31.10.2012 Views

KD-G333/KD-G332/KD-G331 - JVC Multilingual Service Information ...

KD-G333/KD-G332/KD-G331 - JVC Multilingual Service Information ...

KD-G333/KD-G332/KD-G331 - JVC Multilingual Service Information ...

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

Create successful ePaper yourself

Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.

CD RECEIVER<br />

RÉCEPTEUR CD<br />

<strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G333</strong>/<strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G332</strong>/<strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G331</strong><br />

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 5.<br />

Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 5.<br />

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.<br />

Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.<br />

INSTRUCTIONS<br />

MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS<br />

GET0406-003A<br />

[EX/EU]<br />

ENGLISH<br />

FRANÇAIS


ENGLISH<br />

2<br />

Thank you for purchasing a <strong>JVC</strong> product.<br />

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best<br />

possible performance from the unit.<br />

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS<br />

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT<br />

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to<br />

qualified service personnel.<br />

3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical<br />

instruments.<br />

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.<br />

Warning:<br />

If you need to operate the unit while driving, be<br />

sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved<br />

in a traffic accident.<br />

This symbol is only valid in<br />

the European Union.<br />

<strong>Information</strong> for Users on Disposal of Old<br />

Equipment<br />

This symbol indicates that the product with<br />

this symbol should not be disposed as general<br />

household waste at its end-of-life. If you wish to<br />

dispose of this product, please do so in accordance<br />

with applicable national legislation or other rules in<br />

your country and municipality. By disposing of this<br />

product correctly, you will help to conserve natural<br />

resources and will help prevent potential negative<br />

effects on the environment and human health.<br />

Caution on volume setting:<br />

Discs produce very little noise compared with other<br />

sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc<br />

to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden<br />

increase of the output level.<br />

How to reset your unit<br />

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.<br />

How to forcibly eject a disc<br />

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.<br />

• If this does not work, reset your unit.


How to use the M MODE button<br />

If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions<br />

mode, then the number buttons and ¢/4<br />

buttons work as different function buttons.<br />

Ex.: When number button 2 works as<br />

MO (monaural) button.<br />

To use these buttons for their original functions<br />

again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds<br />

without pressing any of these buttons until the<br />

functions mode is cleared or press M MODE again.<br />

Detaching the control panel<br />

Attaching the control panel<br />

This unit is equipped with the steering wheel<br />

remote control function.<br />

• See the Installation/Connection Manual (separate<br />

volume) for connection.<br />

CONTENTS<br />

Control panel — <strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G333</strong>/<strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G332</strong>/<strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G331</strong> .. 4<br />

Getting started ................................ 5<br />

Basic operations ................................................... 5<br />

Radio operations ............................. 6<br />

FM RDS operations ........................... 7<br />

Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme .... 7<br />

Disc operations ................................ 9<br />

Playing a disc in the unit ..................................... 9<br />

Sound adjustments .......................... 11<br />

General settings — PSM .................. 12<br />

Maintenance ................................... 14<br />

More about this unit ........................ 15<br />

Troubleshooting .............................. 17<br />

Specifications .................................. 19<br />

Note: Only for [EX] model users in UK and<br />

European countries<br />

For security reasons, a numbered ID card is provided<br />

with this unit, and the same ID number is imprinted on<br />

the unit’s chassis. Keep the card in a safe place, as it will<br />

help the authorities to identify your unit if stolen.<br />

For safety...<br />

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will<br />

block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.<br />

• Stop the car before performing any complicated<br />

operations.<br />

Temperature inside the car...<br />

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold<br />

weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes<br />

normal before operating the unit.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

3


ENGLISH<br />

4<br />

Control panel — <strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G333</strong>/<strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G332</strong>/<strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G331</strong><br />

Display window<br />

1 0 (eject) button<br />

2 Loading slot<br />

3 (standby/on/attenuator) button<br />

4 SOURCE button<br />

5 Display window<br />

6 BAND button<br />

7 T/P (traffic programme/programme type) button<br />

8 ¢/4 buttons<br />

9 Control dial<br />

p SEL (select) button<br />

q DISP (display) button<br />

w EQ (equalizer) button<br />

e MO (monaural) button<br />

r SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button<br />

t Number buttons<br />

y RPT (repeat) button<br />

u RND (random) button<br />

i M MODE button<br />

Parts identification<br />

o (control panel release) button<br />

; Disc information indicators—<br />

TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)<br />

a DISC indicator<br />

s Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),<br />

(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)<br />

d RDS indicators—AF, REG, TP, PTY<br />

f Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),<br />

ST (stereo)<br />

g LOUD (loudness) indicator<br />

h EQ (equalizer) indicator<br />

j Tr (track) indicator<br />

k Source display / Volume level indicator / Time<br />

countdown indicator<br />

l Main display<br />

/ Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer) indicators—<br />

JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS, USER


Getting started<br />

Basic operations<br />

~ Turn on the power.<br />

Ÿ<br />

* You cannot select “DISC” as the playback source<br />

if there is no disc in the unit.<br />

! For FM/AM tuner<br />

⁄ Adjust the volume.<br />

@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See<br />

page 11.)<br />

To drop the volume in a<br />

moment (ATT)<br />

To restore the sound, press the<br />

button again.<br />

To turn off the power<br />

Volume level appears.<br />

Basic settings<br />

• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 12 and<br />

13.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

1 Canceling the display demonstrations<br />

Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”<br />

2 Setting the clock<br />

Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.<br />

Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the<br />

minute.<br />

Select “24H/12H,” then “24H” (hour) or “12H”<br />

(hour).<br />

3 Finish the procedure.<br />

To check the current clock time while the<br />

power is turned off<br />

Clock time is shown on the<br />

display for about 5 seconds. See<br />

also page 12.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

5


ENGLISH<br />

6<br />

Radio operations<br />

~<br />

Ÿ<br />

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo<br />

broadcast with sufficient signal strength.<br />

! Start searching for a station.<br />

When a station is received,<br />

searching stops.<br />

To stop searching, press the<br />

same button again.<br />

To tune in to a station manually<br />

In step ! above...<br />

1<br />

2 Select a desired station frequency.<br />

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to<br />

receive<br />

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.<br />

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.<br />

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same<br />

procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator<br />

goes off.<br />

Storing stations in memory<br />

You can preset six stations for each band.<br />

FM station automatic presetting —<br />

SSM (Strong-station Sequential<br />

Memory)<br />

1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to<br />

store into.<br />

2<br />

3<br />

“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic<br />

presetting is over.<br />

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are<br />

searched and stored automatically in the FM band.<br />

Manual presetting<br />

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset<br />

number 4 of the FM1 band.<br />

1<br />

2


3<br />

1<br />

Listening to a preset station<br />

2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.<br />

To check the current clock time while<br />

listening to an FM (non-RDS) or AM station<br />

• For FM RDS stations, see page 9.<br />

FM RDS operations<br />

Preset number flashes for a while.<br />

Frequency Ô Clock<br />

What you can do with RDS<br />

RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations to send an<br />

additional signal along with their regular programme<br />

signals.<br />

By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the<br />

following:<br />

• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the following)<br />

• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY Standby<br />

Receptions (see pages 8 and 13)<br />

• Tracing the same programme automatically<br />

—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 8)<br />

• Programme Search (see pages 9 and 13)<br />

Searching for your favorite<br />

FM RDS programme<br />

You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favorite<br />

programme by searching for a PTY code.<br />

• To store your favorite programme types, see the<br />

following.<br />

~ The last selected PTY code<br />

appears.<br />

Ÿ Select one of your favorite programme<br />

types.<br />

or<br />

Select one of the PTY codes (see page<br />

9).<br />

! Start searching for your favorite<br />

programme.<br />

If there is a station broadcasting<br />

a programme of the same PTY<br />

code as you have selected, that<br />

station is tuned in.<br />

Storing your favorite programme<br />

types<br />

You can store six favorite programme types.<br />

Preset programme types in the number buttons<br />

(1 to 6):<br />

1 Select a PTY code (see above).<br />

Continued on the next page<br />

ENGLISH<br />

7


ENGLISH<br />

8<br />

2 Select the preset number (1 – 6) you want to<br />

store into.<br />

Ex.: When “ROCK M” is selected<br />

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to store other PTY<br />

codes into other preset numbers.<br />

4 Finish the procedure.<br />

Using the standby receptions<br />

TA Standby Reception<br />

TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch<br />

temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any<br />

source other than AM.<br />

The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the<br />

current level is lower than the preset level (see page<br />

13).<br />

To activate TA Standby Reception<br />

The TP (Traffic Programme) indicator<br />

either lights up or flashes.<br />

• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby Reception is<br />

activated.<br />

• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby Reception is<br />

not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening<br />

to an FM station without the RDS signals required for<br />

TA Standby Reception.)<br />

To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to another<br />

station providing these signals. The TP indicator will<br />

stop flashing and remain lit.<br />

To deactivate the TA Standby Reception<br />

The TP indicator goes off.<br />

PTY Standby Reception<br />

PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch<br />

temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any<br />

source other than AM.<br />

To activate and select your favorite PTY code for<br />

PTY Standby Reception, see page 13.<br />

The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.<br />

• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby Reception<br />

is activated.<br />

• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is<br />

not yet activated.<br />

To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in to another<br />

station providing these signals. The PTY indicator will<br />

stop flashing and remain lit.<br />

To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception, select<br />

“OFF” for the PTY code (see page 13). The PTY indicator<br />

goes off.<br />

Tracing the same programme—<br />

Network-Tracking Reception<br />

When driving in an area where FM reception is not<br />

sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to<br />

another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly<br />

broadcasting the same programme with stronger<br />

signals (see the illustration below).<br />

When shipped from the factory, Network-Tracking<br />

Reception is activated.<br />

To change the Network-Tracking Reception<br />

setting, see “AF-REG” on page 12.<br />

Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas<br />

(01 – 05)


Automatic station selection—<br />

Programme Search<br />

Usually when you press the number buttons, the preset<br />

station is tuned in.<br />

If the signals from the FM RDS preset station are not<br />

sufficient for good reception, this unit, using the AF<br />

data, tunes in to another frequency broadcasting the<br />

same programme as the original preset station is<br />

broadcasting.<br />

• The unit takes some time to tune in to another<br />

station using programme search.<br />

• See also page 13.<br />

To check the current clock time while<br />

listening to an FM RDS station<br />

PTY codes<br />

NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA,<br />

CULTURE, SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M<br />

(music), EASY M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS,<br />

OTHER M (music), WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL,<br />

RELIGION, PHONE IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY,<br />

NATION M (music), OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT<br />

Disc operations<br />

Station name (PS) = Station<br />

Frequency = Programme<br />

type (PTY) = Clock = (back to<br />

the beginning)<br />

Playing a disc in the unit<br />

~ Turn on the power.<br />

Ÿ<br />

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you<br />

change the source or eject the disc.<br />

To stop play and eject the<br />

disc<br />

• Press SOURCE to listen to<br />

another playback source.<br />

To fast-forward or reverse<br />

the track<br />

To go to the next or<br />

previous tracks<br />

To go to the next or previous folders (only<br />

for MP3 or WMA discs)<br />

To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder<br />

(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly<br />

To select a number from 01 – 06:<br />

To select a number from 07 – 12:<br />

• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it<br />

is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit<br />

numbers at the beginning of their folder names—<br />

01, 02, 03, and so on.<br />

Continued on the next page<br />

ENGLISH<br />

9


ENGLISH<br />

10<br />

To select a particular track in a<br />

folder (for MP3 or WMA disc):<br />

Prohibiting disc ejection<br />

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.<br />

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same<br />

procedure.<br />

Changing the display information<br />

While playing an audio CD or a CD<br />

Text<br />

While playing an MP3 or a WMA disc<br />

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON” (see<br />

page 13)<br />

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”<br />

: Elapsed playing time with the current<br />

track number<br />

: Clock with the current track number<br />

: Corresponding indicator lights up on the<br />

display<br />

* 1 If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.<br />

* 2 If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,<br />

folder name and file name appear. In this case, the<br />

TAG indicator will not light up.<br />

Selecting the playback modes<br />

You can use only one of the following playback modes<br />

at a time.<br />

1<br />

2 Select your desired playback mode.<br />

7 Repeat play<br />

Mode Plays repeatedly<br />

TRK RPT : The current track.<br />

FLDR RPT * : All tracks of the current folder.<br />

RPT OFF : Cancels.<br />

7 Random play<br />

Mode Plays at random<br />

FLDR RND * : All tracks of the current folder,<br />

then tracks of the next folder and<br />

so on.<br />

DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc.<br />

RND OFF : Cancels.<br />

* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.<br />

: Corresponding indicator lights up on<br />

the display


Sound adjustments<br />

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the<br />

music genre (C-EQ: custom equalizer).<br />

1<br />

2<br />

Preset values<br />

Indication (For)<br />

USER<br />

(Flat sound)<br />

ROCK<br />

(Rock or disco music)<br />

CLASSIC<br />

(Classical music)<br />

POPS<br />

(Light music)<br />

HIP HOP<br />

(Funk or rap music)<br />

JAZZ<br />

(Jazz music)<br />

BAS<br />

(bass)<br />

TRE<br />

(treble)<br />

LOUD<br />

(loudness)<br />

00 00 OFF<br />

+03 +01 ON<br />

+01 –02 OFF<br />

+04 +01 OFF<br />

+02 00 ON<br />

+02 +03 OFF<br />

Adjusting the sound<br />

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your<br />

preference.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

Indication, [Range]<br />

BAS* 1 (bass), [–06 to +06]<br />

Adjust the bass.<br />

TRE* 1 (treble), [–06 to +06]<br />

Adjust the treble.<br />

FAD* 2 (fader), [R06 to F06]<br />

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.<br />

BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]<br />

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.<br />

LOUD* 1 (loudness), [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]<br />

Boost low and high frequencies to produce a<br />

well-balanced sound at low volume level.<br />

VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50* 3 ]<br />

Adjust the volume.<br />

* 1 When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness, the<br />

adjustment you have made is stored for the currently<br />

selected sound mode (C-EQ) including “USER.”<br />

* 2 If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader<br />

level to “00.”<br />

* 3 Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See<br />

page 13 for details.)<br />

ENGLISH<br />

11


ENGLISH<br />

12<br />

General settings — PSM<br />

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items<br />

listed in the table that follows.<br />

1<br />

2 Select a PSM item.<br />

Indications Item<br />

( : Initial)<br />

DEMO<br />

• DEMO ON<br />

Display demonstration<br />

• DEMO OFF<br />

CLK DISP * 1<br />

• ON<br />

Clock display<br />

• OFF<br />

CLOCK H<br />

Hour adjustment<br />

CLOCK M<br />

Minute adjustment<br />

24H/12H<br />

Time display mode<br />

CLK ADJ * 2<br />

Clock adjustment<br />

AF-REG * 2<br />

Alternative frequency/<br />

regionalization<br />

reception<br />

Selectable settings, [reference page]<br />

: Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no<br />

operation is done for about 20 seconds, [5].<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is<br />

turned off.<br />

: Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about<br />

5 seconds when the power is turned off, [5].<br />

0 – 23 (1 – 12) [Initial: 0 (0:00)], [5].<br />

00 – 59 [Initial: 00 (0:00)], [5].<br />

• 24H<br />

• 12H<br />

• AUTO<br />

• OFF<br />

• AF<br />

• AF REG<br />

• OFF<br />

3 Adjust the PSM item selected.<br />

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM<br />

items if necessary.<br />

5 Finish the procedure.<br />

: See also page 5 for setting.<br />

: The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT (clock<br />

time) data in the RDS signal.<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: When the currently received signals become weak, the unit<br />

switches to another station (the programme may differ from the<br />

one currently received), [8].<br />

• The AF indicator lights up.<br />

: When the currently received signals become weak, the unit<br />

switches to another station broadcasting the same programme.<br />

• The AF and REG indicators light up.<br />

: Cancels.


Indications Item<br />

( : Initial)<br />

Selectable settings, [reference page]<br />

PTY-STBY * 2<br />

PTY standby<br />

OFF, PTY codes Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [9].<br />

TA VOL * 2<br />

Traffic announcement<br />

volume<br />

P-SEARCH * 2<br />

Programme search<br />

DIMMER<br />

Dimmer<br />

TEL<br />

Telephone muting<br />

SCROLL * 4<br />

Scroll<br />

TAG DISP<br />

Tag display<br />

AMP GAIN<br />

Amplifier gain control<br />

IF BAND<br />

Intermediate frequency<br />

band<br />

VOL 00 – VOL<br />

30 or 50 * 3<br />

• ON<br />

• OFF<br />

• ON<br />

• OFF<br />

• MUTING 1/<br />

MUTING 2<br />

• OFF<br />

• ONCE<br />

• AUTO<br />

• OFF<br />

• TAG ON<br />

• TAG OFF<br />

• LOW PWR<br />

• HIGH PWR<br />

• AUTO<br />

• WIDE<br />

[Initial: VOL 15]<br />

: Activates Programme Search, [9].<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: Dims the display illumination.<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular<br />

phone.<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: Scrolls the disc information once.<br />

: Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).<br />

: Cancels.<br />

• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display<br />

regardless of the setting.<br />

: Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [10].<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the<br />

speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from damaging the<br />

speaker.)<br />

: VOL 00 – VOL 50<br />

: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises<br />

between close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)<br />

: Subject to the interference noises from adjacent stations, but<br />

sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will<br />

remain.<br />

* 1 If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF” to<br />

save the car’s battery.<br />

* 2 Only for FM RDS stations.<br />

* 3 Depends on the amplifier gain control.<br />

* 4 Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

13


ENGLISH<br />

14<br />

Maintenance<br />

How to clean the connectors<br />

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.<br />

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the<br />

connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with<br />

alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.<br />

Connector<br />

Moisture condensation<br />

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in<br />

the following cases:<br />

• After starting the heater in the car.<br />

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.<br />

Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this<br />

case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a<br />

few hours until the moisture evaporates.<br />

How to handle discs<br />

When removing a disc from its Center holder<br />

case, press down the center holder<br />

of the case and lift the disc out,<br />

holding it by the edges.<br />

• Always hold the disc by the edges.<br />

Do not touch its recording surface.<br />

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the<br />

disc around the center holder (with the printed surface<br />

facing up).<br />

• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.<br />

To keep discs clean<br />

A dirty disc may not play correctly.<br />

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with<br />

a soft cloth in a straight line from center<br />

to edge.<br />

• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional<br />

record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean<br />

discs.<br />

To play new discs<br />

New discs may have some rough spots<br />

around the inner and outer edges. If<br />

such a disc is used, this unit may reject<br />

the disc.<br />

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a<br />

pencil or ball-point pen, etc.<br />

Do not use the following discs:<br />

Warped disc<br />

Sticker<br />

Sticker residue<br />

Stick-on label<br />

Unusual shape<br />

Single CD (8 cm disc)


More about this unit<br />

Basic operations<br />

Turning on the power<br />

• By pressing SOURCE on the unit, you can also turn on<br />

the power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.<br />

Turning off the power<br />

• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc<br />

play will start from where playback has been stopped<br />

previously, next time you turn on the power.<br />

Tuner operations<br />

Storing stations in memory<br />

• During SSM search...<br />

– All previously stored stations are erased and<br />

stations are stored newly.<br />

– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest<br />

frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).<br />

– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will<br />

be automatically tuned in.<br />

• When storing a station manually, the previously<br />

preset station is erased when a new station is stored<br />

in the same preset number.<br />

FM RDS operations<br />

• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types of<br />

RDS signals—PI (Programme Identification) and AF<br />

(Alternative Frequency) to work correctly. Without<br />

receiving these data correctly, Network-Tracking<br />

Reception will not operate correctly.<br />

• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby<br />

Reception, the volume level automatically changes to<br />

the preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower<br />

than the preset level.<br />

• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated<br />

(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is<br />

also activated automatically. On the other hand,<br />

Network-Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated<br />

without deactivating Alternative Frequency<br />

Reception. (See page 12.)<br />

• If you want to know more about RDS, visit<br />

.<br />

Disc operations<br />

Caution for DualDisc playback<br />

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply<br />

with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.<br />

Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on<br />

this product may not be recommended.<br />

General<br />

• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD<br />

Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable)<br />

in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA formats.<br />

• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are<br />

used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”<br />

• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or<br />

WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.<br />

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW<br />

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.<br />

• This unit can play back only files of the same type<br />

which are first detected if a disc includes both audio<br />

CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.<br />

• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,<br />

unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.<br />

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on<br />

this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for<br />

the following reasons:<br />

– Discs are dirty or scratched.<br />

– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside<br />

the unit.<br />

– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.<br />

– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with<br />

“Packet Write” method.<br />

– There are improper recording conditions (missing<br />

data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,<br />

warped, etc.).<br />

Continued on the next page<br />

ENGLISH<br />

15


ENGLISH<br />

16<br />

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the<br />

reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular<br />

CDs.<br />

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:<br />

– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck<br />

to the surface.<br />

– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an<br />

ink jet printer.<br />

Using these discs under high temperatures or high<br />

humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the<br />

unit.<br />

Playing an MP3/WMA disc<br />

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the<br />

extension code or (regardless of<br />

the letter case—upper/lower).<br />

• This unit can show the names of albums, artists<br />

(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or<br />

2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.<br />

• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No<br />

other characters can be correctly displayed.<br />

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the<br />

conditions below:<br />

– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps<br />

– Sampling frequency:<br />

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)<br />

24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)<br />

– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,<br />

Joliet, Windows long file name<br />

• The maximum number of characters for file/folder<br />

names vary among the disc format used (includes 4<br />

extension characters— or ).<br />

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters<br />

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters<br />

– Romeo: up to 128 characters<br />

– Joliet: up to 64 characters<br />

– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters<br />

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200<br />

folders, and of 8 hierarchies.<br />

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable<br />

bit rate).<br />

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed<br />

time display, and do not show the actual elapsed<br />

time. Especially, after performing the search function,<br />

this difference becomes noticeable.<br />

• This unit cannot play back the following files:<br />

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.<br />

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.<br />

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.<br />

– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and<br />

voice format.<br />

– WMA files which are not based upon Windows<br />

Media® Audio.<br />

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.<br />

– Files which have the data such as WAVE, ATRAC3,<br />

etc.<br />

• The search function works but search speed is not<br />

constant.<br />

Changing the source<br />

• If you change the source, playback also stops<br />

(without ejecting the disc).<br />

Next time you select “DISC” for the playback source,<br />

disc play starts from where it has been stopped<br />

previously.<br />

Ejecting a disc<br />

• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,<br />

the disc is automatically inserted again into the<br />

loading slot to protect it from dust.<br />

• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you<br />

cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another<br />

disc or press SOURCE to select another playback<br />

source.<br />

General settings—PSM<br />

• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from<br />

“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level<br />

is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically<br />

changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”


Troubleshooting<br />

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.<br />

General<br />

FM/AM<br />

Disc playback<br />

Symptoms Remedies/Causes<br />

• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.<br />

• Check the cords and connections.<br />

• The unit does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).<br />

• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.<br />

• Static noise while listening to the radio. Connect the aerial firmly.<br />

• Disc cannot be played back. Insert the disc correctly.<br />

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.<br />

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped.<br />

• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.<br />

• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you<br />

used for recording.<br />

• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 10).<br />

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).<br />

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.<br />

• Change the disc.<br />

• Check the cords and connections.<br />

• “NO DISC” appears on the display. Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.<br />

Continued on the next page<br />

ENGLISH<br />

17


ENGLISH<br />

18<br />

MP3/WMA playback<br />

Symptoms Remedies/Causes<br />

• Disc cannot be played back. • Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the format<br />

compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or<br />

Joliet.<br />

• Add the extension code or to the file<br />

names.<br />

• Noise is generated. Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the<br />

extension code or to non-MP3 or WMA<br />

tracks.)<br />

• A longer readout time is required (“CHECK”<br />

keeps flashing on the display).<br />

• Tracks are not played back in the order you<br />

have intended.<br />

Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.<br />

Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.<br />

• Elapsed playing time is not correct. This sometimes occurs during play. This is caused by how<br />

the tracks are recorded on the disc.<br />

• “PLEASE EJECT” appears on the display. Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.<br />

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.<br />

album name).<br />

This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),<br />

numbers, and a limited number of symbols.<br />

• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the<br />

United States and/or other countries.


Specifications<br />

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION<br />

Maximum Power Output:<br />

Front/Rear: 50 W per channel<br />

Continuous Power Output (RMS):<br />

Front/Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω,<br />

40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more<br />

than 0.8% total harmonic<br />

distortion.<br />

Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)<br />

Tone Control Range:<br />

Bass: ±12 dB at 100 Hz<br />

Treble: ±12 dB at 10 kHz<br />

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz<br />

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB<br />

Line-Out Level/ 2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)<br />

Impedance:<br />

Output Impedance: 1 kΩ<br />

Other Terminals: Steering wheel remote input<br />

TUNER SECTION<br />

Frequency Range:<br />

FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz<br />

AM: MW: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz<br />

LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz<br />

FM Tuner<br />

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)<br />

50 dB Quieting 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)<br />

Sensitivity:<br />

Alternate Channel 65 dB<br />

Selectivity (400 kHz):<br />

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz<br />

Stereo Separation: 30 dB<br />

MW Tuner<br />

Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB<br />

LW Tuner<br />

Sensitivity: 50 μV<br />

CD PLAYER SECTION<br />

Type: Compact disc player<br />

Signal Detection<br />

System:<br />

Non-contact optical pickup<br />

(semiconductor laser)<br />

Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)<br />

Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz<br />

Dynamic Range: 96 dB<br />

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB<br />

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit<br />

MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)<br />

Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps<br />

WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:<br />

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps<br />

GENERAL<br />

Power Requirement:<br />

Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V<br />

(11 V to 16 V allowance)<br />

Grounding System: Negative ground<br />

Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C<br />

Temperature:<br />

Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)<br />

Installation Size: 182 mm × 52 mm × 150 mm<br />

Panel Size: 187 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm<br />

Mass: 1.4 kg (excluding accessories)<br />

Design and specifications are subject to change without<br />

notice.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

19


Having TROUBLE with operation?<br />

Please reset your unit<br />

Refer to page of How to reset your unit<br />

Vous avez des PROBLÈMES de fonctionnement?<br />

Réinitialisez votre appareil<br />

Référez-vous à la page intitulée Comment réinitialiser votre appareil<br />

Dear Customer,<br />

This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European<br />

directives and standards regarding electromagnetic<br />

compatibility and electrical safety.<br />

European representative of Victor Company of Japan, Limited<br />

is:<br />

<strong>JVC</strong> Technology Centre Europe GmbH<br />

Postfach 10 05 52<br />

61145 Friedberg<br />

Germany<br />

EN, FR<br />

© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited<br />

Cher(e) client(e),<br />

Cet appareil est conforme aux directives et normes<br />

européennes en vigueur concernant la compatibilité<br />

électromagnétique et à la sécurité électrique.<br />

Représentant européen de la société Victor Company of Japan,<br />

Limited:<br />

<strong>JVC</strong> Technology Centre Europe GmbH<br />

Postfach 10 05 52<br />

61145 Friedberg<br />

Allemagne<br />

0906DTSMDTJEIN


GET0406-010A<br />

[EX/EU]<br />

ENGLISH<br />

<strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G333</strong>/<strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G332</strong>/<strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G331</strong><br />

Installation/Connection Manual<br />

Manuel d’installation/raccordement<br />

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle<br />

does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at <strong>JVC</strong> IN-CAR<br />

ENTERTAINMENT dealers.<br />

WARNINGS<br />

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all<br />

electrical connections before installing the unit.<br />

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.<br />

Notes:<br />

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your <strong>JVC</strong> IN-CAR<br />

ENTERTAINMENT dealer.<br />

• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at<br />

the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than<br />

50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 13 of the<br />

INSTRUCTIONS).<br />

• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.<br />

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.<br />

A / B<br />

Hard case/Control panel<br />

Etui de transport/Panneau<br />

de commande<br />

E<br />

Power cord<br />

Cordon d’alimentation<br />

H<br />

Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)<br />

Boulon de montage (M5 × 20 mm)<br />

Heat sink<br />

Dissipateur de chaleur<br />

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:<br />

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit<br />

will be seriously damaged.<br />

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in<br />

your car.<br />

Parts list for installation and connection<br />

The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your <strong>JVC</strong> IN-CAR<br />

ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.<br />

C<br />

Sleeve<br />

Manchon<br />

F<br />

Washer (ø5)<br />

Rondelle (ø5)<br />

I<br />

Rubber cushion<br />

Amortisseur en caoutchouc<br />

1<br />

FRANÇAIS<br />

0906DTSMDTJEIN<br />

EN, FR<br />

© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited<br />

Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE.<br />

Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous pouvez<br />

acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios <strong>JVC</strong>.<br />

AVERTISSEMENTS<br />

Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher la borne négative de la batterie et<br />

d’effectuer tous les raccordements électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.<br />

• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de cet appareil au châssis de la<br />

voiture après l’installation.<br />

Remarques:<br />

• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute souvent, consulter votre revendeur<br />

d’autoradios <strong>JVC</strong>.<br />

• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière<br />

et les enceintes avant, avec une impédance comprise entre 4 Ω et 8 Ω). Si la puissance maximum est<br />

inférieure à 50 W, changez “AMP GAIN” pour éviter d’endommager vos enceintes (voir page 13 du<br />

MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).<br />

• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande<br />

isolante.<br />

• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant<br />

cet appareil.<br />

PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la connexion des enceintes:<br />

• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon,<br />

l’appareil serait sérieusement endommagé.<br />

• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des<br />

enceintes de votre voiture.<br />

Liste des pièces pour l’installation et raccordement<br />

Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose manquait, consultez votre revendeur<br />

autoradio <strong>JVC</strong> immédiatement.<br />

D<br />

Trim plate<br />

Plaque d’assemblage<br />

G<br />

Lock nut (M5)<br />

Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)<br />

J<br />

Handles<br />

Poignées


INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)<br />

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information<br />

regarding installation kits, consult your <strong>JVC</strong> IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying<br />

kits.<br />

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.<br />

Removing the unit<br />

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.<br />

When using the optional stay / Lors de l’utilisation du<br />

hauban en option<br />

Dashboard<br />

Tableau de bord<br />

Fire wall<br />

Cloison<br />

Stay (option)<br />

Hauban (en option)<br />

Screw (option)<br />

Vis (en option)<br />

Install the unit at an angle of less than<br />

30˚.<br />

Installez l’appareil avec un angle de<br />

moins de 30˚.<br />

* 1 When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.<br />

* 2 Not supplied for this unit.<br />

2<br />

INSTALLATION (MONTAGE DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD)<br />

L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si vous avez des questions ou avez besoin<br />

d’information sur des kits d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios <strong>JVC</strong> ou une compagnie<br />

d’approvisionnement.<br />

• Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le faire installer par un technicien<br />

qualifié.<br />

Do the required electrical connections.<br />

Réalisez les connexions électriques.<br />

Retrait de l’appareil<br />

Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.<br />

Insert the two handles, then pull them as<br />

illustrated so that the unit can be removed.<br />

Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la façon<br />

illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.<br />

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the<br />

sleeve firmly in place.<br />

Tordez les languettes appropriées<br />

pour maintenir le manchon en place.<br />

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil<br />

scans utiliser de manchon<br />

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.<br />

Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.<br />

Pocket<br />

Poche<br />

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)* 2<br />

Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)* 2<br />

Bracket* 2<br />

Support* 2<br />

Bracket* 2<br />

Support* 2<br />

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)* 2<br />

Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)* 2<br />

Note : When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws<br />

are used, they could damage the unit.<br />

Remarque : Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de<br />

8 mm. Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.<br />

* 1 Lorsque vous mettez l’appareil à la verticale, faire attention de ne pas endommager le fusible situé sur l’arrière.<br />

* 2 Non fourni avec cet autoradio.


ENGLISH FRANÇAIS<br />

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES<br />

A<br />

B<br />

If your car is equipped with the ISO<br />

connector / Si votre voiture est équippée<br />

d’un connecteur ISO<br />

• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.<br />

Connectez les connecteurs ISO comme montré sur l’illustration.<br />

A<br />

C<br />

E F<br />

G<br />

B<br />

D<br />

Rear ground terminal<br />

Borne arrière de masse<br />

H<br />

I J<br />

K L<br />

M N<br />

O<br />

P<br />

View from the lead side<br />

Vue à partir du côté des fils<br />

Aerial terminal<br />

Borne de l’antenne<br />

White with black stripe<br />

Blanc avec bande noire<br />

Line out (see diagram )<br />

Sortie de ligne<br />

(voir le diagramme )<br />

White<br />

Blanc<br />

Left speaker (front)<br />

Enceinte gauche (avant)<br />

From the car body<br />

De la carrosserie de la<br />

voiture<br />

ISO connector of the supplied power cord<br />

Connecteur ISO pour le cordon d’alimentation<br />

fourni<br />

Connections without using the ISO connectors / Connexions sans l’utilisation des connecteurs ISO<br />

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious<br />

damage to this unit.<br />

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.<br />

1 Cut the ISO connector.<br />

2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.<br />

3 Connect the aerial cord.<br />

4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.<br />

Gray with black stripe<br />

Gris avec bande noire<br />

To steering wheel remote controller (see diagram )<br />

Pour la télécommande de volant (voir le diagramme )<br />

Black<br />

Noir<br />

Yellow * 2<br />

Jaune * 2<br />

Red<br />

Rouge<br />

15 A fuse<br />

Fusible 15 A<br />

Blue with white stripe<br />

Bleu avec bande blanche<br />

Brown<br />

Marron<br />

Gray<br />

Gris<br />

Right speaker (front)<br />

Enceinte droit (avant)<br />

* 1 Not supplied for this unit.<br />

* 2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power<br />

cannot be turned on.<br />

For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Pour certaine voiture VW/Audi ou Opel<br />

(Vauxhall)<br />

You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.<br />

• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.<br />

Vous aurrez peut-être besoin de modifier le câblage du cordon d’alimentation fourni comme montré sur l’illustration.<br />

Contactez votre revendeur automobile autorisé avant d’installer l’appareil.<br />

Original wiring / Câblage original Modified wiring 1 / Câblage modifié 1<br />

ISO connector<br />

Connecteur ISO<br />

Y: Yellow<br />

Jaune<br />

R: Red<br />

Rouge<br />

To metallic body or chassis of the car<br />

Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture<br />

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing<br />

the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)<br />

À une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la voiture<br />

(en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)<br />

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block<br />

Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible<br />

Green with black stripe<br />

Vert avec bande noire<br />

3<br />

Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le câblage du véhicule. Une connexion<br />

incorrecte peut endommager sérieusement l’appareil.<br />

Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de la voiture peuvent être différents en<br />

couleur.<br />

1 Coupez le connecteur ISO.<br />

2 Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.<br />

3 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.<br />

4 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.<br />

Ignition switch<br />

Interrupteur d’allumage<br />

Fuse block<br />

Porte-fusible<br />

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)<br />

Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une<br />

(200 mA max.)<br />

To cellular phone system<br />

À un système de téléphone cellulaire<br />

Green<br />

Vert<br />

Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.<br />

Utilisez le câblage modifié 2 si l’appareil ne se met pas sous tension.<br />

Modified wiring 2 / Câblage modifié 2<br />

Left speaker (rear)<br />

Enceinte gauche (arrière)<br />

Purple with black stripe<br />

Violet avec bande noire<br />

Purple<br />

Violet<br />

Right speaker (rear)<br />

Enceinte droit (arrière)<br />

* 1 Non fourni avec cet autoradio.<br />

* 2 Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut<br />

pas être mis sous tension.


C<br />

Connecting the external amplifier / Connexion d’un amplificateur extérieur<br />

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.<br />

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it<br />

can be controlled through this unit.<br />

• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of<br />

this unit unused.<br />

D<br />

Rear speakers<br />

Enceintes arrière<br />

<strong>JVC</strong> Amplifier<br />

<strong>JVC</strong> Amplificateur<br />

* 3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place not coated with<br />

paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to<br />

the unit.<br />

* 4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)<br />

* 5 Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO connector and connect them to the amplifier.<br />

4<br />

Vous pouvez connecter un amplificateur pour améliorer votre système autoradio.<br />

• Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche) au fil de commande à distance de<br />

l’autre appareil de façon qu’il puisse être commandé via cet appareil.<br />

• Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils<br />

d’enceintes de cet appareil inutilisés.<br />

Remote lead<br />

Fil d’alimentation à distance<br />

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)<br />

Fil d’alimentation à distance (Bleu avec bande blanche)<br />

Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Connexion de la télécommande de volant<br />

If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller, you can operate this unit using the<br />

controller. To do it, a <strong>JVC</strong>’s OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is required.<br />

Consult your <strong>JVC</strong> IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer for details.<br />

TROUBLESHOOTING<br />

• The fuse blows.<br />

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?<br />

• Power cannot be turned on.<br />

* Is the yellow lead connected?<br />

• No sound from the speakers.<br />

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?<br />

• Sound is distorted.<br />

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?<br />

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?<br />

Steering wheel remote input<br />

Entrée de la télécommande de volant<br />

• Noise interfere with sounds.<br />

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?<br />

• This unit becomes hot.<br />

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?<br />

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?<br />

• This unit does not work at all.<br />

* Have you reset your unit?<br />

OE remote adapter (not supplied)<br />

Adaptateur pour télécommande au volant (non fourni)<br />

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)<br />

Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet autoradio)<br />

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any<br />

Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique<br />

s’il y en a une<br />

Si votre voiture est munie d’une télécommande de volant, vous pouvez commander cet autoradio en<br />

utilisant la télécommande. Pour le faire, un adaptateur pour télécommande au volant <strong>JVC</strong> (non fourni)<br />

correspondant à votre voiture est nécessaire. Consultez votre revendeur d’autoradio <strong>JVC</strong> pour les détails.<br />

Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)<br />

Télécommande de volant (installée dans la voiture)<br />

* 3 Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au châssis métallique de la voiture—à un endroit qui n’est pas<br />

recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant d’attacher le fil). L’appareil<br />

peut être endommagé si cela n’est pas fait correctement.<br />

* 4 Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet autoradio)<br />

* 5 Coupez les fils des enceintes arrière du connecteur ISO de la voiture et connectez-les à l’amplificateur.<br />

EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES<br />

• Le fusible saute.<br />

* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?<br />

• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.<br />

* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?<br />

• Pas de son des enceintes.<br />

* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?<br />

• Le son est déformé.<br />

* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?<br />

* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?<br />

• Interférence avec les sons.<br />

* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la voiture avec un cordon court et épais?<br />

• L’appareil devient chaud.<br />

* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?<br />

* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?<br />

• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.<br />

* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?<br />

Rear speakers<br />

Enceintes arrière<br />

Front speakers (see diagram )<br />

Enceintes avant (voir le diagramme )


CD RECEIVER<br />

CD-RECEIVER<br />

РЕСИВЕР С ПРОИГРЫВАТЕЛЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКОВ<br />

<strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G333</strong>/<strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G332</strong>/<strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G331</strong><br />

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 5.<br />

Zum Abbrechen der Displaydemonstration siehe Seite 5.<br />

Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 5.<br />

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.<br />

Für den Einbau und die Anschlüsse siehe das eigenständige Handbuch.<br />

Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.<br />

INSTRUCTIONS<br />

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG<br />

ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ<br />

GET0406-006A<br />

[EY]<br />

ENGLISH<br />

DEUTSCH<br />

РУCCKИЙ


ENGLISH<br />

2<br />

Thank you for purchasing a <strong>JVC</strong> product.<br />

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best<br />

possible performance from the unit.<br />

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS<br />

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT<br />

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to<br />

qualified service personnel.<br />

3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical<br />

instruments.<br />

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.<br />

Warning:<br />

If you need to operate the unit while driving, be<br />

sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved<br />

in a traffic accident.<br />

This symbol is only valid in<br />

the European Union.<br />

<strong>Information</strong> for Users on Disposal of Old<br />

Equipment<br />

This symbol indicates that the product with<br />

this symbol should not be disposed as general<br />

household waste at its end-of-life. If you wish to<br />

dispose of this product, please do so in accordance<br />

with applicable national legislation or other rules in<br />

your country and municipality. By disposing of this<br />

product correctly, you will help to conserve natural<br />

resources and will help prevent potential negative<br />

effects on the environment and human health.<br />

Caution on volume setting:<br />

Discs produce very little noise compared with other<br />

sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc<br />

to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden<br />

increase of the output level.<br />

How to reset your unit<br />

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.<br />

How to forcibly eject a disc<br />

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.<br />

• If this does not work, reset your unit.


How to use the M MODE button<br />

If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions<br />

mode, then the number buttons and ¢/4<br />

buttons work as different function buttons.<br />

Ex.: When number button 2 works as<br />

MO (monaural) button.<br />

To use these buttons for their original functions<br />

again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds<br />

without pressing any of these buttons until the<br />

functions mode is cleared or press M MODE again.<br />

Detaching the control panel<br />

Attaching the control panel<br />

This unit is equipped with the steering wheel<br />

remote control function.<br />

• See the Installation/Connection Manual (separate<br />

volume) for connection.<br />

CONTENTS<br />

Control panel — <strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G333</strong>/<strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G332</strong>/<strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G331</strong> .. 4<br />

Getting started ................................ 5<br />

Basic operations ................................................... 5<br />

Radio operations ............................. 6<br />

FM RDS operations ........................... 7<br />

Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme .... 7<br />

Disc operations ................................ 9<br />

Playing a disc in the unit ..................................... 9<br />

Sound adjustments .......................... 11<br />

General settings — PSM .................. 12<br />

Maintenance ................................... 14<br />

More about this unit ........................ 15<br />

Troubleshooting .............................. 17<br />

Specifications .................................. 19<br />

For security reasons, a numbered ID card is provided<br />

with this unit, and the same ID number is imprinted on<br />

the unit’s chassis. Keep the card in a safe place, as it will<br />

help the authorities to identify your unit if stolen.<br />

For safety...<br />

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will<br />

block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.<br />

• Stop the car before performing any complicated<br />

operations.<br />

Temperature inside the car...<br />

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold<br />

weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes<br />

normal before operating the unit.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

3


ENGLISH<br />

4<br />

Control panel — <strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G333</strong>/<strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G332</strong>/<strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G331</strong><br />

Display window<br />

1 0 (eject) button<br />

2 Loading slot<br />

3 (standby/on/attenuator) button<br />

4 SOURCE button<br />

5 Display window<br />

6 BAND button<br />

7 T/P (traffic programme/programme type) button<br />

8 ¢/4 buttons<br />

9 Control dial<br />

p SEL (select) button<br />

q DISP (display) button<br />

w EQ (equalizer) button<br />

e MO (monaural) button<br />

r SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button<br />

t Number buttons<br />

y RPT (repeat) button<br />

u RND (random) button<br />

i M MODE button<br />

Parts identification<br />

o (control panel release) button<br />

; Disc information indicators—<br />

TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)<br />

a DISC indicator<br />

s Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),<br />

(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)<br />

d RDS indicators—AF, REG, TP, PTY<br />

f Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),<br />

ST (stereo)<br />

g LOUD (loudness) indicator<br />

h EQ (equalizer) indicator<br />

j Tr (track) indicator<br />

k Source display / Volume level indicator / Time<br />

countdown indicator<br />

l Main display<br />

/ Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer) indicators—<br />

JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS, USER


Getting started<br />

Basic operations<br />

~ Turn on the power.<br />

Ÿ<br />

* You cannot select “DISC” as the playback source<br />

if there is no disc in the unit.<br />

! For FM/AM tuner<br />

⁄ Adjust the volume.<br />

@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See<br />

page 11.)<br />

To drop the volume in a<br />

moment (ATT)<br />

To restore the sound, press the<br />

button again.<br />

To turn off the power<br />

Volume level appears.<br />

Basic settings<br />

• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 12 and<br />

13.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

1 Canceling the display demonstrations<br />

Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”<br />

2 Setting the clock<br />

Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.<br />

Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the<br />

minute.<br />

Select “24H/12H,” then “24H” (hour) or “12H”<br />

(hour).<br />

3 Finish the procedure.<br />

To check the current clock time while the<br />

power is turned off<br />

Clock time is shown on the<br />

display for about 5 seconds. See<br />

also page 12.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

5


ENGLISH<br />

6<br />

Radio operations<br />

~<br />

Ÿ<br />

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo<br />

broadcast with sufficient signal strength.<br />

! Start searching for a station.<br />

When a station is received,<br />

searching stops.<br />

To stop searching, press the<br />

same button again.<br />

To tune in to a station manually<br />

In step ! above...<br />

1<br />

2 Select a desired station frequency.<br />

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to<br />

receive<br />

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.<br />

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.<br />

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same<br />

procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator<br />

goes off.<br />

Storing stations in memory<br />

You can preset six stations for each band.<br />

FM station automatic presetting —<br />

SSM (Strong-station Sequential<br />

Memory)<br />

1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to<br />

store into.<br />

2<br />

3<br />

“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic<br />

presetting is over.<br />

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are<br />

searched and stored automatically in the FM band.<br />

Manual presetting<br />

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset<br />

number 4 of the FM1 band.<br />

1<br />

2


3<br />

1<br />

Listening to a preset station<br />

2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.<br />

To check the current clock time while<br />

listening to an FM (non-RDS) or AM station<br />

• For FM RDS stations, see page 9.<br />

FM RDS operations<br />

Preset number flashes for a while.<br />

Frequency Ô Clock<br />

What you can do with RDS<br />

RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations to send an<br />

additional signal along with their regular programme<br />

signals.<br />

By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the<br />

following:<br />

• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the following)<br />

• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY Standby<br />

Receptions (see pages 8 and 13)<br />

• Tracing the same programme automatically<br />

—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 8)<br />

• Programme Search (see pages 9 and 13)<br />

Searching for your favorite<br />

FM RDS programme<br />

You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favorite<br />

programme by searching for a PTY code.<br />

• To store your favorite programme types, see the<br />

following.<br />

~ The last selected PTY code<br />

appears.<br />

Ÿ Select one of your favorite programme<br />

types.<br />

or<br />

Select one of the PTY codes (see page<br />

9).<br />

! Start searching for your favorite<br />

programme.<br />

If there is a station broadcasting<br />

a programme of the same PTY<br />

code as you have selected, that<br />

station is tuned in.<br />

Storing your favorite programme<br />

types<br />

You can store six favorite programme types.<br />

Preset programme types in the number buttons<br />

(1 to 6):<br />

1 Select a PTY code (see above).<br />

Continued on the next page<br />

ENGLISH<br />

7


ENGLISH<br />

8<br />

2 Select the preset number (1 – 6) you want to<br />

store into.<br />

Ex.: When “ROCK M” is selected<br />

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to store other PTY<br />

codes into other preset numbers.<br />

4 Finish the procedure.<br />

Using the standby receptions<br />

TA Standby Reception<br />

TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch<br />

temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any<br />

source other than AM.<br />

The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the<br />

current level is lower than the preset level (see page<br />

13).<br />

To activate TA Standby Reception<br />

The TP (Traffic Programme) indicator<br />

either lights up or flashes.<br />

• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby Reception is<br />

activated.<br />

• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby Reception is<br />

not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening<br />

to an FM station without the RDS signals required for<br />

TA Standby Reception.)<br />

To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to another<br />

station providing these signals. The TP indicator will<br />

stop flashing and remain lit.<br />

To deactivate the TA Standby Reception<br />

The TP indicator goes off.<br />

PTY Standby Reception<br />

PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch<br />

temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any<br />

source other than AM.<br />

To activate and select your favorite PTY code for<br />

PTY Standby Reception, see page 13.<br />

The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.<br />

• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby Reception<br />

is activated.<br />

• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is<br />

not yet activated.<br />

To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in to another<br />

station providing these signals. The PTY indicator will<br />

stop flashing and remain lit.<br />

To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception, select<br />

“OFF” for the PTY code (see page 13). The PTY indicator<br />

goes off.<br />

Tracing the same programme—<br />

Network-Tracking Reception<br />

When driving in an area where FM reception is not<br />

sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to<br />

another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly<br />

broadcasting the same programme with stronger<br />

signals (see the illustration below).<br />

When shipped from the factory, Network-Tracking<br />

Reception is activated.<br />

To change the Network-Tracking Reception<br />

setting, see “AF-REG” on page 12.<br />

Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas<br />

(01 – 05)


Automatic station selection—<br />

Programme Search<br />

Usually when you press the number buttons, the preset<br />

station is tuned in.<br />

If the signals from the FM RDS preset station are not<br />

sufficient for good reception, this unit, using the AF<br />

data, tunes in to another frequency broadcasting the<br />

same programme as the original preset station is<br />

broadcasting.<br />

• The unit takes some time to tune in to another<br />

station using programme search.<br />

• See also page 13.<br />

To check the current clock time while<br />

listening to an FM RDS station<br />

PTY codes<br />

NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA,<br />

CULTURE, SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M<br />

(music), EASY M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS,<br />

OTHER M (music), WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL,<br />

RELIGION, PHONE IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY,<br />

NATION M (music), OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT<br />

Disc operations<br />

Station name (PS) = Station<br />

Frequency = Programme<br />

type (PTY) = Clock = (back to<br />

the beginning)<br />

Playing a disc in the unit<br />

~ Turn on the power.<br />

Ÿ<br />

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you<br />

change the source or eject the disc.<br />

To stop play and eject the<br />

disc<br />

• Press SOURCE to listen to<br />

another playback source.<br />

To fast-forward or reverse<br />

the track<br />

To go to the next or<br />

previous tracks<br />

To go to the next or previous folders (only<br />

for MP3 or WMA discs)<br />

To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder<br />

(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly<br />

To select a number from 01 – 06:<br />

To select a number from 07 – 12:<br />

• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it<br />

is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit<br />

numbers at the beginning of their folder names—<br />

01, 02, 03, and so on.<br />

Continued on the next page<br />

ENGLISH<br />

9


ENGLISH<br />

10<br />

To select a particular track in a<br />

folder (for MP3 or WMA disc):<br />

Prohibiting disc ejection<br />

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.<br />

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same<br />

procedure.<br />

Changing the display information<br />

While playing an audio CD or a CD<br />

Text<br />

While playing an MP3 or a WMA disc<br />

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON” (see<br />

page 13)<br />

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”<br />

: Elapsed playing time with the current<br />

track number<br />

: Clock with the current track number<br />

: Corresponding indicator lights up on the<br />

display<br />

* 1 If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.<br />

* 2 If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,<br />

folder name and file name appear. In this case, the<br />

TAG indicator will not light up.<br />

Selecting the playback modes<br />

You can use only one of the following playback modes<br />

at a time.<br />

1<br />

2 Select your desired playback mode.<br />

7 Repeat play<br />

Mode Plays repeatedly<br />

TRK RPT : The current track.<br />

FLDR RPT * : All tracks of the current folder.<br />

RPT OFF : Cancels.<br />

7 Random play<br />

Mode Plays at random<br />

FLDR RND * : All tracks of the current folder,<br />

then tracks of the next folder and<br />

so on.<br />

DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc.<br />

RND OFF : Cancels.<br />

* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.<br />

: Corresponding indicator lights up on<br />

the display


Sound adjustments<br />

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the<br />

music genre (C-EQ: custom equalizer).<br />

1<br />

2<br />

Preset values<br />

Indication (For)<br />

USER<br />

(Flat sound)<br />

ROCK<br />

(Rock or disco music)<br />

CLASSIC<br />

(Classical music)<br />

POPS<br />

(Light music)<br />

HIP HOP<br />

(Funk or rap music)<br />

JAZZ<br />

(Jazz music)<br />

BAS<br />

(bass)<br />

TRE<br />

(treble)<br />

LOUD<br />

(loudness)<br />

00 00 OFF<br />

+03 +01 ON<br />

+01 –02 OFF<br />

+04 +01 OFF<br />

+02 00 ON<br />

+02 +03 OFF<br />

Adjusting the sound<br />

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your<br />

preference.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

Indication, [Range]<br />

BAS* 1 (bass), [–06 to +06]<br />

Adjust the bass.<br />

TRE* 1 (treble), [–06 to +06]<br />

Adjust the treble.<br />

FAD* 2 (fader), [R06 to F06]<br />

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.<br />

BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]<br />

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.<br />

LOUD* 1 (loudness), [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]<br />

Boost low and high frequencies to produce a<br />

well-balanced sound at low volume level.<br />

VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50* 3 ]<br />

Adjust the volume.<br />

* 1 When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness, the<br />

adjustment you have made is stored for the currently<br />

selected sound mode (C-EQ) including “USER.”<br />

* 2 If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader<br />

level to “00.”<br />

* 3 Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See<br />

page 13 for details.)<br />

ENGLISH<br />

11


ENGLISH<br />

12<br />

General settings — PSM<br />

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items<br />

listed in the table that follows.<br />

1<br />

2 Select a PSM item.<br />

Indications Item<br />

( : Initial)<br />

DEMO<br />

• DEMO ON<br />

Display demonstration<br />

• DEMO OFF<br />

CLK DISP * 1<br />

• ON<br />

Clock display<br />

• OFF<br />

CLOCK H<br />

Hour adjustment<br />

CLOCK M<br />

Minute adjustment<br />

24H/12H<br />

Time display mode<br />

CLK ADJ * 2<br />

Clock adjustment<br />

AF-REG * 2<br />

Alternative frequency/<br />

regionalization<br />

reception<br />

Selectable settings, [reference page]<br />

: Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no<br />

operation is done for about 20 seconds, [5].<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is<br />

turned off.<br />

: Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about<br />

5 seconds when the power is turned off, [5].<br />

0 – 23 (1 – 12) [Initial: 0 (0:00)], [5].<br />

00 – 59 [Initial: 00 (0:00)], [5].<br />

• 24H<br />

• 12H<br />

• AUTO<br />

• OFF<br />

• AF<br />

• AF REG<br />

• OFF<br />

3 Adjust the PSM item selected.<br />

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM<br />

items if necessary.<br />

5 Finish the procedure.<br />

: See also page 5 for setting.<br />

: The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT (clock<br />

time) data in the RDS signal.<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: When the currently received signals become weak, the unit<br />

switches to another station (the programme may differ from the<br />

one currently received), [8].<br />

• The AF indicator lights up.<br />

: When the currently received signals become weak, the unit<br />

switches to another station broadcasting the same programme.<br />

• The AF and REG indicators light up.<br />

: Cancels.


Indications Item<br />

( : Initial)<br />

Selectable settings, [reference page]<br />

PTY-STBY * 2<br />

PTY standby<br />

OFF, PTY codes Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [9].<br />

TA VOL * 2<br />

Traffic announcement<br />

volume<br />

P-SEARCH * 2<br />

Programme search<br />

DIMMER<br />

Dimmer<br />

TEL<br />

Telephone muting<br />

SCROLL * 4<br />

Scroll<br />

TAG DISP<br />

Tag display<br />

AMP GAIN<br />

Amplifier gain control<br />

IF BAND<br />

Intermediate frequency<br />

band<br />

VOL 00 – VOL<br />

30 or 50 * 3<br />

• ON<br />

• OFF<br />

• ON<br />

• OFF<br />

• MUTING 1/<br />

MUTING 2<br />

• OFF<br />

• ONCE<br />

• AUTO<br />

• OFF<br />

• TAG ON<br />

• TAG OFF<br />

• LOW PWR<br />

• HIGH PWR<br />

• AUTO<br />

• WIDE<br />

[Initial: VOL 15]<br />

: Activates Programme Search, [9].<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: Dims the display illumination.<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular<br />

phone.<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: Scrolls the disc information once.<br />

: Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).<br />

: Cancels.<br />

• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display<br />

regardless of the setting.<br />

: Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [10].<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the<br />

speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from damaging the<br />

speaker.)<br />

: VOL 00 – VOL 50<br />

: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises<br />

between close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)<br />

: Subject to the interference noises from adjacent stations, but<br />

sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will<br />

remain.<br />

* 1 If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF” to<br />

save the car’s battery.<br />

* 2 Only for FM RDS stations.<br />

* 3 Depends on the amplifier gain control.<br />

* 4 Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

13


ENGLISH<br />

14<br />

Maintenance<br />

How to clean the connectors<br />

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.<br />

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the<br />

connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with<br />

alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.<br />

Connector<br />

Moisture condensation<br />

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in<br />

the following cases:<br />

• After starting the heater in the car.<br />

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.<br />

Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this<br />

case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a<br />

few hours until the moisture evaporates.<br />

How to handle discs<br />

When removing a disc from its Center holder<br />

case, press down the center holder<br />

of the case and lift the disc out,<br />

holding it by the edges.<br />

• Always hold the disc by the edges.<br />

Do not touch its recording surface.<br />

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the<br />

disc around the center holder (with the printed surface<br />

facing up).<br />

• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.<br />

To keep discs clean<br />

A dirty disc may not play correctly.<br />

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with<br />

a soft cloth in a straight line from center<br />

to edge.<br />

• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional<br />

record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean<br />

discs.<br />

To play new discs<br />

New discs may have some rough spots<br />

around the inner and outer edges. If<br />

such a disc is used, this unit may reject<br />

the disc.<br />

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a<br />

pencil or ball-point pen, etc.<br />

Do not use the following discs:<br />

Warped disc<br />

Sticker<br />

Sticker residue<br />

Stick-on label<br />

Unusual shape<br />

Single CD (8 cm disc)


More about this unit<br />

Basic operations<br />

Turning on the power<br />

• By pressing SOURCE on the unit, you can also turn on<br />

the power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.<br />

Turning off the power<br />

• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc<br />

play will start from where playback has been stopped<br />

previously, next time you turn on the power.<br />

Tuner operations<br />

Storing stations in memory<br />

• During SSM search...<br />

– All previously stored stations are erased and<br />

stations are stored newly.<br />

– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest<br />

frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).<br />

– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will<br />

be automatically tuned in.<br />

• When storing a station manually, the previously<br />

preset station is erased when a new station is stored<br />

in the same preset number.<br />

FM RDS operations<br />

• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types of<br />

RDS signals—PI (Programme Identification) and AF<br />

(Alternative Frequency) to work correctly. Without<br />

receiving these data correctly, Network-Tracking<br />

Reception will not operate correctly.<br />

• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby<br />

Reception, the volume level automatically changes to<br />

the preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower<br />

than the preset level.<br />

• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated<br />

(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is<br />

also activated automatically. On the other hand,<br />

Network-Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated<br />

without deactivating Alternative Frequency<br />

Reception. (See page 12.)<br />

• If you want to know more about RDS, visit<br />

.<br />

Disc operations<br />

Caution for DualDisc playback<br />

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply<br />

with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.<br />

Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on<br />

this product may not be recommended.<br />

General<br />

• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD<br />

Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable)<br />

in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA formats.<br />

• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are<br />

used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”<br />

• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or<br />

WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.<br />

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW<br />

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.<br />

• This unit can play back only files of the same type<br />

which are first detected if a disc includes both audio<br />

CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.<br />

• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,<br />

unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.<br />

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on<br />

this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for<br />

the following reasons:<br />

– Discs are dirty or scratched.<br />

– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside<br />

the unit.<br />

– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.<br />

– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with<br />

“Packet Write” method.<br />

– There are improper recording conditions (missing<br />

data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,<br />

warped, etc.).<br />

Continued on the next page<br />

ENGLISH<br />

15


ENGLISH<br />

16<br />

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the<br />

reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular<br />

CDs.<br />

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:<br />

– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck<br />

to the surface.<br />

– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an<br />

ink jet printer.<br />

Using these discs under high temperatures or high<br />

humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the<br />

unit.<br />

Playing an MP3/WMA disc<br />

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the<br />

extension code or (regardless of<br />

the letter case—upper/lower).<br />

• This unit can show the names of albums, artists<br />

(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or<br />

2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.<br />

• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No<br />

other characters can be correctly displayed.<br />

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the<br />

conditions below:<br />

– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps<br />

– Sampling frequency:<br />

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)<br />

24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)<br />

– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,<br />

Joliet, Windows long file name<br />

• The maximum number of characters for file/folder<br />

names vary among the disc format used (includes 4<br />

extension characters— or ).<br />

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters<br />

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters<br />

– Romeo: up to 128 characters<br />

– Joliet: up to 64 characters<br />

– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters<br />

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200<br />

folders, and of 8 hierarchies.<br />

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable<br />

bit rate).<br />

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed<br />

time display, and do not show the actual elapsed<br />

time. Especially, after performing the search function,<br />

this difference becomes noticeable.<br />

• This unit cannot play back the following files:<br />

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.<br />

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.<br />

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.<br />

– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and<br />

voice format.<br />

– WMA files which are not based upon Windows<br />

Media® Audio.<br />

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.<br />

– Files which have the data such as WAVE, ATRAC3,<br />

etc.<br />

• The search function works but search speed is not<br />

constant.<br />

Changing the source<br />

• If you change the source, playback also stops<br />

(without ejecting the disc).<br />

Next time you select “DISC” for the playback source,<br />

disc play starts from where it has been stopped<br />

previously.<br />

Ejecting a disc<br />

• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,<br />

the disc is automatically inserted again into the<br />

loading slot to protect it from dust.<br />

• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you<br />

cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another<br />

disc or press SOURCE to select another playback<br />

source.<br />

General settings—PSM<br />

• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from<br />

“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level<br />

is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically<br />

changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”


Troubleshooting<br />

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.<br />

General<br />

FM/AM<br />

Disc playback<br />

Symptoms Remedies/Causes<br />

• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.<br />

• Check the cords and connections.<br />

• The unit does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).<br />

• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.<br />

• Static noise while listening to the radio. Connect the aerial firmly.<br />

• Disc cannot be played back. Insert the disc correctly.<br />

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.<br />

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped.<br />

• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.<br />

• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you<br />

used for recording.<br />

• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 10).<br />

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).<br />

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.<br />

• Change the disc.<br />

• Check the cords and connections.<br />

• “NO DISC” appears on the display. Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.<br />

Continued on the next page<br />

ENGLISH<br />

17


ENGLISH<br />

18<br />

MP3/WMA playback<br />

Symptoms Remedies/Causes<br />

• Disc cannot be played back. • Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the format<br />

compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or<br />

Joliet.<br />

• Add the extension code or to the file<br />

names.<br />

• Noise is generated. Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the<br />

extension code or to non-MP3 or WMA<br />

tracks.)<br />

• A longer readout time is required (“CHECK”<br />

keeps flashing on the display).<br />

• Tracks are not played back in the order you<br />

have intended.<br />

Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.<br />

Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.<br />

• Elapsed playing time is not correct. This sometimes occurs during play. This is caused by how<br />

the tracks are recorded on the disc.<br />

• “PLEASE EJECT” appears on the display. Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.<br />

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.<br />

album name).<br />

This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),<br />

numbers, and a limited number of symbols.<br />

• Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the<br />

United States and/or other countries.


Specifications<br />

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION<br />

Maximum Power Output:<br />

Front/Rear: 50 W per channel<br />

Continuous Power Output (RMS):<br />

Front/Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω,<br />

40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more<br />

than 0.8% total harmonic<br />

distortion.<br />

Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)<br />

Tone Control Range:<br />

Bass: ±12 dB at 100 Hz<br />

Treble: ±12 dB at 10 kHz<br />

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz<br />

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB<br />

Line-Out Level/ 2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)<br />

Impedance:<br />

Output Impedance: 1 kΩ<br />

Other Terminals: Steering wheel remote input<br />

TUNER SECTION<br />

Frequency Range:<br />

FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz<br />

AM: MW: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz<br />

LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz<br />

FM Tuner<br />

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)<br />

50 dB Quieting 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)<br />

Sensitivity:<br />

Alternate Channel 65 dB<br />

Selectivity (400 kHz):<br />

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz<br />

Stereo Separation: 30 dB<br />

MW Tuner<br />

Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB<br />

LW Tuner<br />

Sensitivity: 50 μV<br />

CD PLAYER SECTION<br />

Type: Compact disc player<br />

Signal Detection<br />

System:<br />

Non-contact optical pickup<br />

(semiconductor laser)<br />

Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)<br />

Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz<br />

Dynamic Range: 96 dB<br />

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB<br />

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit<br />

MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)<br />

Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps<br />

WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:<br />

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps<br />

GENERAL<br />

Power Requirement:<br />

Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V<br />

(11 V to 16 V allowance)<br />

Grounding System: Negative ground<br />

Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C<br />

Temperature:<br />

Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)<br />

Installation Size: 182 mm × 52 mm × 150 mm<br />

Panel Size: 187 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm<br />

Mass: 1.4 kg (excluding accessories)<br />

Design and specifications are subject to change without<br />

notice.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

19


Having TROUBLE with operation?<br />

Please reset your unit<br />

Refer to page of How to reset your unit<br />

Haben Sie PROBLEME mit dem Betrieb?<br />

Bitte setzen Sie Ihr Gerät zurück<br />

Siehe Seite Zurücksetzen des Geräts<br />

Затруднения при эксплуатации?<br />

Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство<br />

Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства обратитесь на<br />

соответствующую страницу<br />

Dear Customer,<br />

This apparatus is in conformance with the valid European<br />

directives and standards regarding electromagnetic<br />

compatibility and electrical safety.<br />

European representative of Victor Company of Japan, Limited<br />

is:<br />

<strong>JVC</strong> Technology Centre Europe GmbH<br />

Postfach 10 05 52<br />

61145 Friedberg<br />

Germany<br />

Sehr geehrter Kunde, sehr geehrte Kundin,<br />

dieses Gerät stimmt mit den gültigen europäischen Richtlinien<br />

und Normen bezüglich elektromagnetischer Verträglichkeit<br />

und elektrischer Sicherheit überein.<br />

Die europäische Vertretung für die Victor Company of Japan,<br />

Limited ist:<br />

<strong>JVC</strong> Technology Centre Europe GmbH<br />

Postfach 10 05 52<br />

61145 Friedberg<br />

Deutschland<br />

EN, GE, RU<br />

© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited<br />

Уважаемый клиент.<br />

Данное устройство соответствует действительным<br />

Европейским директивам и стандартам по электромагнитной<br />

совместимости и электрической безопасности.<br />

Представительство компании Victor Company of Japan,<br />

Limited в Европе:<br />

<strong>JVC</strong> Technology Centre Europe GmbH<br />

Postfach 10 05 52<br />

61145 Friedberg<br />

Германия<br />

0906DTSMDTJEIN


GET0406-013A<br />

[EY]<br />

ENGLISH<br />

<strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G333</strong>/<strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G332</strong>/<strong>KD</strong>-<strong>G331</strong><br />

Installation/Connection Manual<br />

Einbau/Anschlußanleitung<br />

Руководство по установке/подключению 0906DTSMDTJEIN<br />

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground<br />

electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a<br />

voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at <strong>JVC</strong> IN-CAR<br />

ENTERTAINMENT dealers.<br />

WARNINGS<br />

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the<br />

battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before<br />

installing the unit.<br />

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after<br />

installation.<br />

Notes:<br />

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows<br />

frequently, consult your <strong>JVC</strong> IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.<br />

• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum<br />

power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an<br />

impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W,<br />

change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being<br />

damaged (see page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS).<br />

• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads<br />

with insulating tape.<br />

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it<br />

when removing this unit.<br />

A / B<br />

Hard case/Control panel<br />

Etui/Schalttafel<br />

Жесткий футляр/панель управления<br />

E<br />

Power cord<br />

Stromkable<br />

Кабель питания<br />

Heat sink<br />

Abstrahlblech<br />

Радиатор<br />

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker<br />

connections:<br />

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the<br />

car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.<br />

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the<br />

speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.<br />

Parts list for installation and connection<br />

The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing,<br />

consult your <strong>JVC</strong> IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.<br />

H<br />

Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)<br />

Befestigungsschraube (M5 × 20 mm)<br />

Крепежный болт (M5 × 20 мм)<br />

DEUTSCH<br />

Dieses Gerät ist für einen Betrieb in elektrischen Anlagen mit 12 V<br />

Gleichstrom und (–) Erdung ausgelegt. Verfügt Ihr Fahrzeug nicht<br />

über diese Anlage, ist ein Spannungsinverter erforderlich, der bei <strong>JVC</strong><br />

Autoradiohändler erworben werden kann.<br />

WARNUNGEN<br />

Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen empfehlen wir, daß Sie den<br />

negativen Batterieanschluß abtrennen und alle elektrischen Anschlüsse<br />

herstellen, bevor das Gerät eingebaut wird.<br />

• Sicherstellen, daß das Gerät nach dem Einbau a Chassis des<br />

Fahrzeugs geerdet wird.<br />

Hinweise:<br />

• Die Sicherung mit einer der entsprechenden Nennleistung ersetzen.<br />

Brennt die Sicherung häufig durch, wenden Sie sich an ihren <strong>JVC</strong><br />

Autoradiohändler.<br />

• Es wird empfohlen, Lautsprecher mit einer Maximalleistung von<br />

mehr als 50 W anzuschließen (sowohl hinten als auch vorne, mit<br />

einer Impedanz von 4 Ω bis 8 Ω). Wenn die Maximalleistung<br />

weniger als 50 W beträgt, stellen Sie „AMP GAIN“ anders ein, um<br />

Schäden an den Lautsprechern zu vermeiden (siehe Seite 13 der<br />

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).<br />

• Zur Vermeidung eines Kurzschlusses die Anschlußklemmen<br />

der NICHT VERWENDETEN Leitungen mit Isolierklebeband<br />

umwickeln.<br />

• Das Abstrahlblech wird nach dem Gebrauch sehr heiß. Beim Ausbau<br />

des Geräts darauf achten, das Abstrahlblech nicht zu berühren.<br />

VORSICHTSMASSREGELN beim Anschließen<br />

der Stromversorgung und Lautsprecher:<br />

• Die Lautsprecherleitungen des Netzkabels NICHT an der<br />

Autobatterie anschließen, da sonst das Gerät schwer<br />

beschädigt wird.<br />

• VOR dem Anschließen der Lautsprecherleitungen des<br />

Spannunsgversorgungskabels an die Lautsprecher, die<br />

Lautsprecherverdrahtung in Ihrem Auto überprüfen.<br />

Teileliste für den Einbau und Anschluß<br />

Die folgenden Teile werden zusammen mit diesem Gerät geliefert.<br />

Falls ein Artikel fehlt, wenden Sie sich sofort an Ihren <strong>JVC</strong>-<br />

Autoradiohändler.<br />

C<br />

Sleeve<br />

Halterung<br />

Муфта<br />

F<br />

Washer (ø5)<br />

Unterlegscheibe (ø5)<br />

Шайба (њ5)<br />

I<br />

Rubber cushion<br />

Gummipuffer<br />

Резиновый чехол<br />

1<br />

РУССКИЙ<br />

J<br />

Handles<br />

Griffe<br />

Рычаги<br />

EN, GE, RU<br />

© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited<br />

Это устройство разработано для эксплуатации на 12 В<br />

постоянного напряжения с минусом на массе. Если Ваш<br />

автомобиль не имеет этой системы, требуется инвертор<br />

напряжения, который может быть приобретен у дилера<br />

автомобилнего специалиста <strong>JVC</strong>.<br />

ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ<br />

Для предотвращения коротких замыканий мы рекомендуем<br />

Вам отсоединить отрицательный разъем аккумулятора и<br />

осуществить все подключения перед установкой устройства.<br />

• После установки обязательно заземлите данное<br />

устройство на шасси автомобиля.<br />

Примечания:<br />

• Заменяйте предохранитель другим предохранителем<br />

указанного класса. Если предохранитель сгорает слишком<br />

часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего специалиста <strong>JVC</strong>.<br />

• Рекомендуется подключать динамики с максимальной<br />

мощностью более 50 Вт (к задней и передней панели<br />

устройства, с полным сопротивлением от 4 Ω до 8 Ω). Если<br />

максимальная мощность динамиков менее 50 Вт, перейдите в<br />

режим “AMP GAIN”, чтобы предотвратить их повреждение (см.<br />

ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 13).<br />

• Для предотвращения короткого замыкания заклейте<br />

НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫЕ концы изолирующей лентой.<br />

• Радиатор во время использования сильно нагревается.<br />

Старайтесь его не трогать во время удаления устройства.<br />

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по питанию и<br />

подключению громкоговорителей:<br />

• НЕ подключайте провода громкоговорителей к<br />

аккумулятору автомобиля, иначе устройство будет<br />

повреждено.<br />

• ПЕРЕД подключением проводов громкоговорителей<br />

к кабелю питания громкоговорителя проверьте схему<br />

соединений громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.<br />

Список деталей для установки и<br />

подключения<br />

Следующие детали поставлены в комплекте с устройством.<br />

При отсутствии какого-либо элемента немедленно свяжитесь с<br />

дилером автомобильного специалиста <strong>JVC</strong>.<br />

D<br />

Trim plate<br />

Frontrahmen<br />

Декоративную панель<br />

G<br />

Lock nut (M5)<br />

Sicherungsmutter (M5)<br />

Фиксирующая гайка (M5)


INSTALLATION<br />

(IN-DASH MOUNTING)<br />

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have<br />

any questions or require information regarding installation kits,<br />

consult your <strong>JVC</strong> IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company<br />

supplying kits.<br />

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed<br />

by a qualified technician.<br />

Removing the unit<br />

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.<br />

When using the optional stay / Beim Verwenden der Anker-<br />

Option / При использовании дополнительной стойки<br />

Dashboard<br />

Armaturenbrett<br />

Приборная панель<br />

Fire wall<br />

Feuerwand<br />

Стена<br />

Stay (option)<br />

Anker (Option)<br />

Стойка<br />

(дополнительно)<br />

EINBAU<br />

(IM ARMATURENBRETT)<br />

Die folgende Abbildung zeigt einen typischen Einbau. Bei<br />

irgendwelchen Fragen oder wenn Sie <strong>Information</strong>en hinsichtlich<br />

des Einbausatzes brauchen, wenden Sie sich an ihren <strong>JVC</strong><br />

Autoradiohändler oder ein Unternehmen das diese Einbausätze<br />

vertreibt.<br />

• Sind Sie sich über den richtigen Einbau des Geräts nicht sicher, lassen<br />

Sie es von einem qualifizierten Techniker einbauen.<br />

Screw (option)<br />

Schraube (Option)<br />

Винт (дополнительно)<br />

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.<br />

Stellen Sie das Gerät mit einem Winkel von<br />

weniger als 30˚ auf.<br />

Установите устройство под углом менее 30°.<br />

* 1 When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.<br />

* 2 Not supplied for this unit.<br />

Ausbau des Geräts<br />

Vor dem Ausbau des Geräts den hinteren Teil freigeben.<br />

2<br />

Do the required electrical connections.<br />

Nehmen Sie die erforderlichen elektrischen<br />

Anschlüsse vor.<br />

Выполните необходимые подключения<br />

контактов, как показано на оборотной<br />

стороне этой инструкции.<br />

УСТАНОВКА (УСТАНОВКА В<br />

ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ)<br />

На следующих иллюстрациях показана типовая установка.<br />

Если у Вас есть какие-либо вопросы, касающиеся установки,<br />

обратитесь к Вашему дилеру автомобилнего специалиста<br />

<strong>JVC</strong> или в компанию, поставляющую соответствующие<br />

принадлежности.<br />

• Если Вы не знаете точно, как следует устанавливать это<br />

устройство, обратитесь к квалифицированному специалисту.<br />

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Beim Einbau des Geräts ohne<br />

Halterung / При установке устройства без использования муфты<br />

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.<br />

Zum Beispiel in einem Toyota zuerst das Autoradio ausbauen und dann das Gerät an seinem Platz einbauen.<br />

В автомобиле Тойота, например, сначала извлеките автомобильный радиоприемник и установите устройство<br />

на место.<br />

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)* 2<br />

Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)* 2<br />

Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)* 2<br />

Pocket<br />

Taschen<br />

Карман<br />

Insert the two handles, then pull them as illustrated so<br />

that the unit can be removed.<br />

Die beiden Handgriffe einsetzen und dann ziehen wie<br />

in der Abbildung gezeigt, so daß das Gerät entfernt<br />

werden kann.<br />

Вставьте два рычажка, затем потяните их, как<br />

показано на рисунке, чтобы вынуть устройство.<br />

Bracket* 2<br />

Konsole* 2<br />

Кронштейн* 2<br />

Bracket* 2<br />

Konsole* 2<br />

Кронштейн* 2<br />

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the<br />

sleeve firmly in place.<br />

Die geeigneten Zapfen biegen, um die<br />

Manschette sicher festzuhalten.<br />

Отогните соответствующие<br />

фиксаторы, предназначенные для<br />

прочной установки корпуса.<br />

Удаление устройства<br />

Перед удалением устройства освободите заднюю часть.<br />

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)* 2<br />

Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)* 2<br />

Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)* 2<br />

Note : When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer<br />

screws are used, they could damage the unit.<br />

Hinweis : Beim Anbringen des Gerät an der Konsole sicherstellen, daß 8 mm lange Schrauben verwendet werden.<br />

Werden längere Schrauben verwendet, können sie das Gerät beschädigen.<br />

Примечание : При установке устройства на крепежный кронштейн, используйте только винты длиной 8 мм.<br />

При использовании более длинных винтов можно повредить устройство.<br />

* 1 Beim Aufstellen des Geräts darauf achten, daß die Sicherung auf der<br />

Rückseite nicht beschädigt wird.<br />

* 2 Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.<br />

* 1 Устанавливайте устройство таким образом, чтобы не повредить<br />

предохранитель, расположенный сзади.<br />

* 2 Hе входит в комплект поставки.


ENGLISH DEUTSCH<br />

A<br />

A<br />

C<br />

E F<br />

G<br />

B<br />

D<br />

H<br />

Rear ground terminal<br />

Hintere Erdungscanschlußklemme<br />

Задний разъем<br />

заземления<br />

Aerial terminal<br />

Antennenanschlußklemme<br />

Line out (see diagram )<br />

Schutz kappen Signalausgang<br />

(siehe Schaltplan )<br />

К выходу (см. схему )<br />

Разъем антенны Black<br />

White with black stripe<br />

Weiß mit schwarzem<br />

Streifen<br />

Белый с черной<br />

полосой<br />

White<br />

Weiß<br />

Белый<br />

Left speaker (front)<br />

Linker Lautsprecher (vorne)<br />

Левый громкоговоритель<br />

(передний)<br />

Gray with black stripe<br />

Grau mit schwarzem<br />

Streifen<br />

Серый с черной<br />

полосой<br />

Schwarz<br />

Черный<br />

Yellow* 2<br />

Gelb* 2<br />

Желтый* 2<br />

Red<br />

Rot<br />

Красный<br />

15 A fuse<br />

15 A Sicherung<br />

Предохранитель 15 A<br />

Blue with white stripe<br />

Blau mit weißem Streifen<br />

Синий с белой полосой<br />

Brown<br />

Braun<br />

Коричневый<br />

Gray<br />

Grau<br />

Серый<br />

Right speaker (front)<br />

Rechter Lautsprecher (vorne)<br />

Правый громкоговоритель<br />

(передний)<br />

To metallic body or chassis of the car<br />

Zur metallenen Karosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des Autos<br />

К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля<br />

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the<br />

ignition switch) (constant 12 V)<br />

Zur einer stromführenden Anschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock zum Anschließen<br />

an die Autobatterie (Umgehen des Zündschalters) (konstant 12 V)<br />

К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя (минуя блок зажигания)<br />

(постоянный 12 В)<br />

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block<br />

Zur einer Zubehöranschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock<br />

К вспомогательному разъему в блоке предохранителя<br />

Green with black stripe<br />

Grün mit schwarzem<br />

Streifen<br />

Зеленый с черной<br />

полосой<br />

3<br />

Ignition switch<br />

Zündschalter<br />

Переключатель зажигания<br />

Fuse block<br />

Sicherungsblock<br />

Блок предохранителя<br />

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)<br />

Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden (max. 200 mA)<br />

К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны (макс. 200 мА)<br />

To cellular phone system<br />

Zur Mobiltelefon<br />

К системе сотового телефона<br />

Green<br />

Grün<br />

Зеленый<br />

РУССКИЙ<br />

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLÜSSE ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ<br />

If your car is equipped with the ISO<br />

connector / Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit dem<br />

ISO-Steckverbinder ausgestattet ist / Если<br />

автомобиль оснащен разъемом ISO<br />

• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.<br />

• Schließen Sie die ISO-Steckverbinder an, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.<br />

• Подключите разъемы ISO, как показано на рисунке.<br />

B<br />

I J<br />

K L<br />

M N<br />

O<br />

P<br />

View from the lead side<br />

Von der Kabelseite aus gesehen<br />

Вид со стороны выводов<br />

From the car body<br />

Von der Fahrzeugkarosserie<br />

От корпуса автомобиля<br />

ISO connector of the supplied power cord<br />

ISO-Stecker des mitgelieferten Stromkabels<br />

Разъем ISO шнура питания, входящего в<br />

комплект поставки<br />

For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Bei bestimmten VW-/Audi- order Opel-<br />

(Vauxhall-) Fahrzeugen / Для некоторых автомобилей VW/Audi или Opel (Vauxhall)<br />

You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.<br />

• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.<br />

Es kann erforderlich sein, die Verdrahtung des mitgelieferten Stromkabels zu modifizieren, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.<br />

• Wenden Sie sich vor dem Einbau dieses Receivers an Ihre Auto-Fachwerkstatt.<br />

Возможно, потребуется изменить схему соединений для прилагаемого шнура питания, как показано на рисунке.<br />

• Перед установкой приемника обратитесь к авторизованному агенту по продажам автомобильных систем.<br />

Original wiring / Original verdrahtung /<br />

Исходная схема соединений<br />

ISO connector<br />

ISO-Steckverbinder<br />

Разъем ISO<br />

Y: Yellow<br />

Gelb<br />

Желтый<br />

R: Red<br />

R ot<br />

Красный<br />

Modified wiring 1 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 1 /<br />

Преобразованная схема соединений 1<br />

Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.<br />

Verwenden Sie die modifizierte Verdrahtung 2 wenn der Receiver nicht einschaltet.<br />

Если приемник не включается, используйте преобразованную схему<br />

соединений 2.<br />

Modified wiring 2 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 2 /<br />

Преобразованная схема соединений 2<br />

Connections without using the ISO connectors / Anschlüsse ohne Verwendung der ISO-Steckverbinder / Подключение без использования<br />

разъемов ISO<br />

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.<br />

Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.<br />

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car<br />

body may be different in color.<br />

1 Cut the ISO connector.<br />

2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order<br />

specified in the illustration below.<br />

3 Connect the aerial cord.<br />

4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.<br />

* 1 Not supplied for this unit.<br />

* 2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this<br />

lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.<br />

Vor dem Anschließen: Die Verdrahtung im Fahrzeug sorgfältig<br />

überprüfen. Falsche Anschlüsse können ernsthafte Schäden am Gerät<br />

hervorrufen.<br />

Die Leiter des Stromkabels und die Leiter des Anschlusses im Fahrzeug<br />

können sich farblich unterscheiden.<br />

1 Schneiden Sie den ISO-Steckverbinder auf.<br />

2 Die farbigen Adern des Stromkabels in der Reihenfolge anschließen,<br />

wie in der Abbildung unten gezeigt.<br />

3 Das Antennenkabel anschließen.<br />

4 Die Kabelbäume am Gerät anschließen.<br />

To steering wheel remote controller (see diagram )<br />

An Lenkradfernbedienung (siehe Schaltplan )<br />

К рулевому пульту дистанционного управления (см. схему )<br />

* 1 Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.<br />

* 2 Vor der Überprüfung der Funktionsfähigkeit des Geräts vor dem<br />

Einbau, muß diese Leitung angeschlossen werden, da sonst die<br />

Stromversorgung nicht eingeschaltet werden kann.<br />

Перед началом подключений: Тщательно проверьте<br />

проводку в автомобиле. Неправильное подключение может<br />

привести к серьезному повреждению устройства.<br />

Жилы силового кабеля и жилы соединителя от кузова<br />

автомобиля могут быть разного цвета.<br />

1 Обрежьте разъем ISO.<br />

2 Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания в<br />

указанном ниже порядке.<br />

3 Подключите кабель антенны.<br />

4 В последнюю очередь подключите электропроводку к<br />

устройству.<br />

Purple with black stripe<br />

Lila mit schwarzem<br />

Streifen<br />

Пурпурный с черной<br />

полосой<br />

Left speaker (rear)<br />

Linker Lautsprecher (hinten)<br />

Левый громкоговоритель<br />

(задний)<br />

Purple<br />

Lila<br />

Пурпурный<br />

Right speaker (rear)<br />

Rechter Lautsprecher (hinten)<br />

Правый громкоговоритель<br />

(задний)<br />

* 1 Не входит в комплект поставки.<br />

* 2 Перед проверкой работы устройства подключите этот провод,<br />

иначе питание не включится.


C<br />

Connecting the external amplifier / Anschließen des externen Verstärkers / Подключение внешнего усилителя<br />

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.<br />

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote<br />

lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through<br />

this unit.<br />

• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the<br />

amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.<br />

D<br />

Rear speakers<br />

Hintere Lautsprecher<br />

Задние<br />

громкоговорители<br />

<strong>JVC</strong> Amplifier<br />

<strong>JVC</strong> Verstärker<br />

<strong>JVC</strong>-усилитель<br />

* 3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis<br />

of the car—to the place not coated with paint (if coated with paint,<br />

remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause<br />

damage to the unit.<br />

* 4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)<br />

* 5 Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO connector and connect them<br />

to the amplifier.<br />

TROUBLESHOOTING<br />

• The fuse blows.<br />

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?<br />

• Power cannot be turned on.<br />

* Is the yellow lead connected?<br />

• No sound from the speakers.<br />

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?<br />

• Sound is distorted.<br />

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?<br />

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?<br />

• Noise interfere with sounds.<br />

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using<br />

shorter and thicker cords?<br />

• This unit becomes hot.<br />

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?<br />

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?<br />

• This unit does not work at all.<br />

* Have you reset your unit?<br />

Sie können einen Verstärker anschließen, um Ihre Autostereoanlage zu<br />

erweitern.<br />

• Schließen Sie das Fernbedienungskabel (blau mit weißem Streifen) an<br />

das Fernbedienungskabel des anderen Geräts an, so daß es über dieses<br />

Gerät gesteuert werden kann.<br />

• Die Lautsprecher von diesem Gerät abtrennen und am<br />

Verstärker anschließen. Die Lautsprecherleitungen dieses<br />

Geräts unbenutzt lassen.<br />

FEHLERSUCHE<br />

4<br />

Remote lead<br />

Fernbedienungsleitung<br />

Провод внешнего устройства<br />

* 3 Verbinden Sie den Erdungsleiter mit der Karosserie oder dem Rahmen<br />

des Fahrzeugs. Die Kontaktstelle darf nicht lackiert sein (sollte die<br />

Kontaktstelle lackiert sein, entfernen Sie den Lack der Kontaktstelle, bevor<br />

Sie den Leiter befestigen). Wenn der Erdungsleiter nicht ordnungsgemäß<br />

angeschlossen wird, kann dieses Gerät beschädigt werden.<br />

* 4 Einzelleitung (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)<br />

* 5 Schneiden Sie die hinteren Lautsprecherkabel des ISO-Steckverbinders des<br />

Fahrzeugs ab, und schließen diese an den Verstärker an.<br />

• Die Sicherung brennt durch.<br />

* Sind die roten und schwarzen Leitungen richtig angeschlossen?<br />

• Stromversorgung kann nicht eingeschaltet werden.<br />

* Ist die gelbe Leitung angeschlossen?<br />

• Kein Ton aus den Lautsprechern.<br />

* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung kurzgeschlossen?<br />

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)<br />

Fernbedienungsleitung (Blau mit weißem Streifen)<br />

Провод внешнего устройства (Синий с белой полосой)<br />

• Ton verzerrt.<br />

* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?<br />

* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher<br />

zusammen geerdet?<br />

• Störgeräusche im Klang.<br />

* Ist die hintere Erdungsklemme mit kürzeren und dickeren Kabeln an<br />

das Fahrzeugchassis angeschlossen?<br />

• Gerät wird heiß.<br />

* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?<br />

* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher<br />

zusammen geerdet?<br />

• Dieser Receiver funktioniert überhaupt nicht.<br />

* Haben Sie einen Reset am Receiver vorgenommen?<br />

Можно подключить усилитель для обновления автомобильной<br />

стереосистемы.<br />

• Подсоедините провод внешнего устройства (синий с<br />

белой полосой) к проводу внешнего устройства другого<br />

оборудования так, чтобы им можно было управлять с этого<br />

устройства.<br />

• Отсоедините громкоговорители от данного<br />

устройства, подключите их к усилителю. Оставьте<br />

провода громкоговорителей данного устройства<br />

неиспользованными.<br />

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)<br />

Y-Anschluß (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)<br />

Разъем Y (не входит в комплект поставки)<br />

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any<br />

Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden<br />

К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны<br />

Rear speakers<br />

Hintere Lautsprecher<br />

Задние громкоговорители<br />

Front speakers (see diagram )<br />

Vordere Lautsprecher (siehe Schaltplan )<br />

Передние громкоговорители (см. схему )<br />

Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Anschluß an die Lenkradfernbedienung / Подключение к рулевому пульту<br />

дистанционного управления<br />

If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller,<br />

you can operate this unit using the controller. To do it, a <strong>JVC</strong>’s<br />

OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is<br />

required. Consult your <strong>JVC</strong> IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer<br />

for details.<br />

Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit einer Lenkradferndienung ausgestattet ist,<br />

können Sie damit diesen Receiver steuern. Hierfür ist ein für Ihr<br />

Fahrzeug passender Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption von<br />

<strong>JVC</strong> (nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten) erforderlich. Für weitere<br />

Einzelheiten wenden Sie sich an Ihren <strong>JVC</strong> Autoradiohändler.<br />

Steering wheel remote input<br />

Eingang für Lenkradfernbedienung<br />

Вход рулевого пульта<br />

дистанционного управления<br />

Если автомобиль оборудован рулевым пультом<br />

дистанционного управления, его можно использовать для<br />

управления данным устройством. Для этого необходим<br />

адаптер рулевого пульта дистанционного управления <strong>JVC</strong><br />

OE (не поставляется), подходящий для Вашего автомобиля.<br />

За более подробной информацией обратитесь к поставщику<br />

OE remote adapter (not supplied) автомобильных аудиосистем компании <strong>JVC</strong>.<br />

Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption (nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten)<br />

Aдаптер рулевого пульта дистанционного управления OE (не поставляется)<br />

Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)<br />

Lenkradfernbedienung (im Fahrzeug installiert)<br />

Рулевой пульт дистанционного управления (устанавливаемый в автомобиле)<br />

* 3 Плотно прикрепите заземляющий провод к металлическому<br />

кузову или шасси автомобиля—в месте, не покрытом краской<br />

(если оно покрыто краской, удалите краску перед тем, как<br />

прикреплять провод). Невыполнение этого требования может<br />

привести к повреждению данного устройства.<br />

* 4 Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект поставки)<br />

* 5 Отрежьте провода задних громкоговорителей разъема ISO и<br />

подсоеди ните их к усилителю.<br />

BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ<br />

• Сработал предохранитель.<br />

* Правильно ли подключены черный и красный провода?<br />

• Питание не включается.<br />

* Подключен ли желтый провод?<br />

• Звук не выводится через громкоговорители.<br />

* Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле выхода<br />

громкоговорителей?<br />

• Звук искажен.<br />

* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?<br />

* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)<br />

громкоговорителей?<br />

• Шум мешает звучанию.<br />

* Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим заземления с шасси<br />

автомобиля с помощью более короткого и тонкого шнуров?<br />

• Устройство нагревается.<br />

* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?<br />

* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)<br />

громкоговорителей?<br />

• Приемник не работает.<br />

* Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?


CD RECEIVER<br />

РЕСИВЕР С ПРОИГРЫВАТЕЛЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКОВ<br />

ПРИЙМАЧ З ПРОГРАВАЧЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКІВ<br />

<strong>KD</strong>-G337<br />

В соответствии с Законом Российской Федерации “О защите прав потре бителей” срок службы (годности) данного<br />

товара “по истечении которого он может представлять опасность для жизни, здоровья потребителя, причинять вред<br />

его имуществу или окружающей среде” составляет семь (7) лет со дня производства. Этот срок является временем,<br />

в течение которого потребитель данного товара может безопасно им пользоваться при условии соблюдения<br />

ин струк ции по эксплуатации данного товара, проводя необходимое обслуживание, включающее замену расходных<br />

материалов и/или соответствующее ремонтное обеспечение в специализированном сервисном центре.<br />

Дополнительные косметические материалы к данному товару, поставляе мые вместе с ним, могут храниться в<br />

течение двух (2) лет со дня его производства.<br />

Срок службы (годности), кроме срока хранения дополнительных космети ческих материалов, упомянутых<br />

в предыдущих двух пунктах, не затрагивает никаких других прав потребителя, в частности, гарантийного<br />

свидетельства <strong>JVC</strong>, которое он может получить в соответствии с законом о правах потребителя или других законов,<br />

связанных с ним.<br />

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 5.<br />

Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 5.<br />

Інформацію щодо відміни демонстрації функцій дисплею див. на стор. 5.<br />

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.<br />

Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.<br />

Вказівки по встановленню та виконанню підключень наведені у окремій інструкції.<br />

INSTRUCTIONS<br />

ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ<br />

ІНСТРУКЦІЇ<br />

GET0407-001A<br />

[EE]<br />

ENGLISH<br />

РУCCKИЙ<br />

УКРАЇНА


ENGLISH<br />

2<br />

Thank you for purchasing a <strong>JVC</strong> product.<br />

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best<br />

possible performance from the unit.<br />

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS<br />

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT<br />

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to<br />

qualified service personnel.<br />

3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical<br />

instruments.<br />

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.<br />

Warning:<br />

[European Union only]<br />

If you need to operate the unit while driving, be<br />

sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved<br />

in a traffic accident.<br />

Caution on volume setting:<br />

Discs produce very little noise compared with other<br />

sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc<br />

to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden<br />

increase of the output level.<br />

How to reset your unit<br />

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.<br />

How to forcibly eject a disc<br />

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.<br />

• If this does not work, reset your unit.


How to use the M MODE button<br />

If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions<br />

mode, then the number buttons and ¢/4<br />

buttons work as different function buttons.<br />

Ex.: When number button 2 works as<br />

MO (monaural) button.<br />

To use these buttons for their original functions<br />

again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds<br />

without pressing any of these buttons until the<br />

functions mode is cleared or press M MODE again.<br />

Detaching the control panel<br />

Attaching the control panel<br />

For safety...<br />

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will<br />

block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.<br />

• Stop the car before performing any complicated<br />

operations.<br />

Temperature inside the car...<br />

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold<br />

weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes<br />

normal before operating the unit.<br />

CONTENTS<br />

Control panel .................................. 4<br />

Getting started ................................ 5<br />

Basic operations ................................................... 5<br />

Radio operations ............................. 6<br />

FM RDS operations ........................... 7<br />

Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme .... 7<br />

Disc operations ................................ 9<br />

Playing a disc in the unit ..................................... 9<br />

Sound adjustments .......................... 11<br />

General settings — PSM .................. 12<br />

Remote controller — RM-RK50 ............ 14<br />

Maintenance ................................... 15<br />

More about this unit ........................ 16<br />

Troubleshooting .............................. 18<br />

Specifications .................................. 19<br />

Available characters on the display<br />

Available characters<br />

Display indications<br />

ENGLISH<br />

3


ENGLISH<br />

4<br />

Control panel<br />

Display window<br />

1 0 (eject) button<br />

2 Loading slot<br />

3 (standby/on/attenuator) button<br />

4 Remote sensor<br />

DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light<br />

(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).<br />

5 SOURCE button<br />

6 Display window<br />

7 BAND button<br />

8 T/P (traffic programme/programme type) button<br />

9 ¢/4 buttons<br />

p Control dial<br />

q SEL (select) button<br />

w DISP (display) button<br />

e EQ (equalizer) button<br />

r MO (monaural) button<br />

t SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button<br />

y Number buttons<br />

u RPT (repeat) button<br />

Parts identification<br />

i RND (random) button<br />

o M MODE button<br />

; (control panel release) button<br />

a Disc information indicators—<br />

TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)<br />

s DISC indicator<br />

d Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),<br />

(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)<br />

f RDS indicators—AF, REG, TP, PTY<br />

g Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),<br />

ST (stereo)<br />

h LOUD (loudness) indicator<br />

j EQ (equalizer) indicator<br />

k Tr (track) indicator<br />

l Source display / Volume level indicator / Time<br />

countdown indicator<br />

/ Main display<br />

z Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer) indicators—<br />

JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS, USER


Getting started<br />

Basic operations<br />

~ Turn on the power.<br />

Ÿ<br />

* You cannot select “DISC” as the playback source<br />

if there is no disc in the unit.<br />

! For FM/AM tuner<br />

⁄ Adjust the volume.<br />

@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See<br />

page 11.)<br />

To drop the volume in a<br />

moment (ATT)<br />

To restore the sound, press the<br />

button again.<br />

To turn off the power<br />

Volume level appears.<br />

Basic settings<br />

• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 12 and<br />

13.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

1 Canceling the display demonstrations<br />

Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”<br />

2 Setting the clock<br />

Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.<br />

Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the<br />

minute.<br />

Select “24H/12H,” then “24H” (hour) or “12H”<br />

(hour).<br />

3 Finish the procedure.<br />

To check the current clock time while the<br />

power is turned off<br />

Clock time is shown on the<br />

display for about 5 seconds. See<br />

also page 12.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

5


ENGLISH<br />

6<br />

Radio operations<br />

~<br />

Ÿ<br />

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo<br />

broadcast with sufficient signal strength.<br />

! Start searching for a station.<br />

When a station is received,<br />

searching stops.<br />

To stop searching, press the<br />

same button again.<br />

To tune in to a station manually<br />

In step ! above...<br />

1<br />

2 Select a desired station frequency.<br />

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to<br />

receive<br />

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.<br />

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.<br />

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same<br />

procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator<br />

goes off.<br />

Storing stations in memory<br />

You can preset six stations for each band.<br />

FM station automatic presetting —<br />

SSM (Strong-station Sequential<br />

Memory)<br />

1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to<br />

store into.<br />

2<br />

3<br />

“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic<br />

presetting is over.<br />

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are<br />

searched and stored automatically in the FM band.<br />

Manual presetting<br />

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset<br />

number 4 of the FM1 band.<br />

1<br />

2


3<br />

1<br />

Listening to a preset station<br />

2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.<br />

To check the current clock time while<br />

listening to an FM (non-RDS) or AM station<br />

• For FM RDS stations, see page 9.<br />

FM RDS operations<br />

Preset number flashes for a while.<br />

Frequency Ô Clock<br />

What you can do with RDS<br />

RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations to send an<br />

additional signal along with their regular programme<br />

signals.<br />

By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the<br />

following:<br />

• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the following)<br />

• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY Standby<br />

Receptions (see pages 8 and 13)<br />

• Tracing the same programme automatically<br />

—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 8)<br />

• Programme Search (see pages 9 and 13)<br />

Searching for your favorite<br />

FM RDS programme<br />

You can tune in to a station broadcasting your favorite<br />

programme by searching for a PTY code.<br />

• To store your favorite programme types, see the<br />

following.<br />

~ The last selected PTY code<br />

appears.<br />

Ÿ Select one of your favorite programme<br />

types.<br />

or<br />

Select one of the PTY codes (see page<br />

9).<br />

! Start searching for your favorite<br />

programme.<br />

If there is a station broadcasting<br />

a programme of the same PTY<br />

code as you have selected, that<br />

station is tuned in.<br />

Storing your favorite programme<br />

types<br />

You can store six favorite programme types.<br />

Preset programme types in the number buttons<br />

(1 to 6):<br />

1 Select a PTY code (see above).<br />

Continued on the next page<br />

ENGLISH<br />

7


ENGLISH<br />

8<br />

2 Select the preset number (1 – 6) you want to<br />

store into.<br />

Ex.: When “ROCK M” is selected<br />

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to store other PTY<br />

codes into other preset numbers.<br />

4 Finish the procedure.<br />

Using the standby receptions<br />

TA Standby Reception<br />

TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch<br />

temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA) from any<br />

source other than AM.<br />

The volume changes to the preset TA volume level if the<br />

current level is lower than the preset level (see page<br />

13).<br />

To activate TA Standby Reception<br />

The TP (Traffic Programme) indicator<br />

either lights up or flashes.<br />

• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby Reception is<br />

activated.<br />

• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby Reception is<br />

not yet activated. (This occurs when you are listening<br />

to an FM station without the RDS signals required for<br />

TA Standby Reception.)<br />

To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to another<br />

station providing these signals. The TP indicator will<br />

stop flashing and remain lit.<br />

To deactivate the TA Standby Reception<br />

The TP indicator goes off.<br />

PTY Standby Reception<br />

PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to switch<br />

temporarily to your favorite PTY programme from any<br />

source other than AM.<br />

To activate and select your favorite PTY code for<br />

PTY Standby Reception, see page 13.<br />

The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.<br />

• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby Reception<br />

is activated.<br />

• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby Reception is<br />

not yet activated.<br />

To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in to another<br />

station providing these signals. The PTY indicator will<br />

stop flashing and remain lit.<br />

To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception, select<br />

“OFF” for the PTY code (see page 13). The PTY indicator<br />

goes off.<br />

Tracing the same programme—<br />

Network-Tracking Reception<br />

When driving in an area where FM reception is not<br />

sufficient enough, this unit automatically tunes in to<br />

another FM RDS station of the same network, possibly<br />

broadcasting the same programme with stronger<br />

signals (see the illustration below).<br />

When shipped from the factory, Network-Tracking<br />

Reception is activated.<br />

To change the Network-Tracking Reception<br />

setting, see “AF-REG” on page 12.<br />

Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas<br />

(01 – 05)


Automatic station selection—<br />

Programme Search<br />

Usually when you press the number buttons, the preset<br />

station is tuned in.<br />

If the signals from the FM RDS preset station are not<br />

sufficient for good reception, this unit, using the AF<br />

data, tunes in to another frequency broadcasting the<br />

same programme as the original preset station is<br />

broadcasting.<br />

• The unit takes some time to tune in to another<br />

station using programme search.<br />

• See also page 13.<br />

To check the current clock time while<br />

listening to an FM RDS station<br />

PTY codes<br />

NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA,<br />

CULTURE, SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M<br />

(music), EASY M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS,<br />

OTHER M (music), WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL,<br />

RELIGION, PHONE IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY,<br />

NATION M (music), OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT<br />

Disc operations<br />

Station name (PS) = Station<br />

Frequency = Programme<br />

type (PTY) = Clock = (back to<br />

the beginning)<br />

Playing a disc in the unit<br />

~ Turn on the power.<br />

Ÿ<br />

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you<br />

change the source or eject the disc.<br />

To stop play and eject the<br />

disc<br />

• Press SOURCE to listen to<br />

another playback source.<br />

To fast-forward or reverse<br />

the track<br />

To go to the next or<br />

previous tracks<br />

To go to the next or previous folders (only<br />

for MP3 or WMA discs)<br />

To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder<br />

(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly<br />

To select a number from 01 – 06:<br />

To select a number from 07 – 12:<br />

• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it<br />

is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit<br />

numbers at the beginning of their folder names—<br />

01, 02, 03, and so on.<br />

Continued on the next page<br />

ENGLISH<br />

9


ENGLISH<br />

10<br />

To select a particular track in a<br />

folder (for MP3 or WMA disc):<br />

Prohibiting disc ejection<br />

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.<br />

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same<br />

procedure.<br />

Changing the display information<br />

While playing an audio CD or a<br />

CD Text<br />

While playing an MP3 or a WMA disc<br />

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON” (see<br />

page 13)<br />

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”<br />

: Elapsed playing time with the current<br />

track number<br />

: Clock with the current track number<br />

: Corresponding indicator lights up on the<br />

display<br />

* 1 If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.<br />

* 2 If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,<br />

folder name and file name appear. In this case, the<br />

TAG indicator will not light up.<br />

Selecting the playback modes<br />

You can use only one of the following playback modes<br />

at a time.<br />

1<br />

2 Select your desired playback mode.<br />

7 Repeat play<br />

Mode Plays repeatedly<br />

TRK RPT : The current track.<br />

FLDR RPT * : All tracks of the current folder.<br />

RPT OFF : Cancels.<br />

7 Random play<br />

Mode Plays at random<br />

FLDR RND * : All tracks of the current folder,<br />

then tracks of the next folder and<br />

so on.<br />

DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc.<br />

RND OFF : Cancels.<br />

* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.<br />

: Corresponding indicator lights up on<br />

the display


Sound adjustments<br />

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the<br />

music genre (C-EQ: custom equalizer).<br />

1<br />

2<br />

Preset values<br />

Indication (For)<br />

USER<br />

(Flat sound)<br />

ROCK<br />

(Rock or disco music)<br />

CLASSIC<br />

(Classical music)<br />

POPS<br />

(Light music)<br />

HIP HOP<br />

(Funk or rap music)<br />

JAZZ<br />

(Jazz music)<br />

BAS<br />

(bass)<br />

TRE<br />

(treble)<br />

LOUD<br />

(loudness)<br />

00 00 OFF<br />

+03 +01 ON<br />

+01 –02 OFF<br />

+04 +01 OFF<br />

+02 00 ON<br />

+02 +03 OFF<br />

Adjusting the sound<br />

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your<br />

preference.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

Indication, [Range]<br />

BAS * 1 (bass), [–06 to +06]<br />

Adjust the bass.<br />

TRE * 1 (treble), [–06 to +06]<br />

Adjust the treble.<br />

FAD * 2 (fader), [R06 to F06]<br />

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.<br />

BAL (balance), [L06 to R06]<br />

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.<br />

LOUD * 1 (loudness), [LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]<br />

Boost low and high frequencies to produce a<br />

well-balanced sound at low volume level.<br />

VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50* 3 ]<br />

Adjust the volume.<br />

* 1 When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness, the<br />

adjustment you have made is stored for the currently<br />

selected sound mode (C-EQ) including “USER.”<br />

* 2 If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader<br />

level to “00.”<br />

* 3 Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See<br />

page 13 for details.)<br />

ENGLISH<br />

11


ENGLISH<br />

12<br />

General settings — PSM<br />

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items<br />

listed in the table that follows.<br />

1<br />

2 Select a PSM item.<br />

Indications Item<br />

( : Initial)<br />

DEMO<br />

• DEMO ON<br />

Display demonstration<br />

• DEMO OFF<br />

CLK DISP * 1<br />

• ON<br />

Clock display<br />

• OFF<br />

CLOCK H<br />

Hour adjustment<br />

CLOCK M<br />

Minute adjustment<br />

24H/12H<br />

Time display mode<br />

CLK ADJ * 2<br />

Clock adjustment<br />

AF-REG * 2<br />

Alternative frequency/<br />

regionalization<br />

reception<br />

Selectable settings, [reference page]<br />

: Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no<br />

operation is done for about 20 seconds, [5].<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is<br />

turned off.<br />

: Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about<br />

5 seconds when the power is turned off, [5].<br />

0 – 23 (1 – 12) [Initial: 0 (0:00)], [5].<br />

00 – 59 [Initial: 00 (0:00)], [5].<br />

• 24H<br />

• 12H<br />

• AUTO<br />

• OFF<br />

• AF<br />

• AF REG<br />

• OFF<br />

3 Adjust the PSM item selected.<br />

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM<br />

items if necessary.<br />

5 Finish the procedure.<br />

: See also page 5 for setting.<br />

: The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using the CT (clock<br />

time) data in the RDS signal.<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: When the currently received signals become weak, the unit<br />

switches to another station (the programme may differ from the<br />

one currently received), [8].<br />

• The AF indicator lights up.<br />

: When the currently received signals become weak, the unit<br />

switches to another station broadcasting the same programme.<br />

• The AF and REG indicators light up.<br />

: Cancels.


Indications Item<br />

( : Initial)<br />

Selectable settings, [reference page]<br />

PTY-STBY * 2<br />

PTY standby<br />

OFF, PTY codes Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [9].<br />

TA VOL * 2<br />

Traffic announcement<br />

volume<br />

P-SEARCH * 2<br />

Programme search<br />

DIMMER<br />

Dimmer<br />

TEL<br />

Telephone muting<br />

SCROLL * 4<br />

Scroll<br />

TAG DISP<br />

Tag display<br />

AMP GAIN<br />

Amplifier gain control<br />

IF BAND<br />

Intermediate frequency<br />

band<br />

VOL 00 – VOL<br />

30 or 50 * 3<br />

• ON<br />

• OFF<br />

• ON<br />

• OFF<br />

• MUTING 1/<br />

MUTING 2<br />

• OFF<br />

• ONCE<br />

• AUTO<br />

• OFF<br />

• TAG ON<br />

• TAG OFF<br />

• LOW PWR<br />

• HIGH PWR<br />

• AUTO<br />

• WIDE<br />

[Initial: VOL 15]<br />

: Activates Programme Search, [9].<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: Dims the display illumination.<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: Select either one which mutes the sounds while using a cellular<br />

phone.<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: Scrolls the disc information once.<br />

: Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).<br />

: Cancels.<br />

• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display<br />

regardless of the setting.<br />

: Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [10].<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the<br />

speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from damaging the<br />

speaker.)<br />

: VOL 00 – VOL 50<br />

: Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce interference noises<br />

between close stations. (Stereo effect may be lost.)<br />

: Subject to the interference noises from adjacent stations, but<br />

sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo effect will<br />

remain.<br />

* 1 If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF” to<br />

save the car’s battery.<br />

* 2 Only for FM RDS stations.<br />

* 3 Depends on the amplifier gain control.<br />

* 4 Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

13


ENGLISH<br />

14<br />

Remote controller — RM-RK50<br />

This unit can be remotely controlled as instructed here<br />

(with an optionally purchased remote controller). We<br />

recommend that you use remote controller RM-RK50<br />

with your unit.<br />

Installing the lithium coin battery<br />

(CR2025)<br />

Aim the remote controller directly at the remote<br />

sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle<br />

in between.<br />

Warning:<br />

• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or<br />

its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.<br />

• Do not leave the remote controller in a place<br />

(such as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight<br />

for a long time; otherwise, it may explode.<br />

• Store the battery in a place where children<br />

cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.<br />

• To prevent the battery from over-heating,<br />

cracking, or starting a fire:<br />

– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the<br />

battery, or dispose of it in a fire.<br />

– Do not leave the battery with other metallic<br />

materials.<br />

– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar<br />

tools.<br />

– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when<br />

throwing away or saving it.<br />

Main elements and features<br />

1 (standby/on/attenuator) button<br />

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or<br />

attenuates the sound when the power is on.<br />

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.<br />

2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons<br />

• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.<br />

• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.<br />

• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.<br />

3 VOL – / VOL + buttons<br />

• Adjusts the volume level.<br />

4 SOUND button<br />

• Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom<br />

equalizer).<br />

5 SOURCE button<br />

• Selects the source.<br />

6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons<br />

• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.<br />

• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and<br />

held.<br />

• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.


Maintenance<br />

How to clean the connectors<br />

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.<br />

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the<br />

connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with<br />

alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.<br />

Connector<br />

Moisture condensation<br />

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in<br />

the following cases:<br />

• After starting the heater in the car.<br />

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.<br />

Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this<br />

case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a<br />

few hours until the moisture evaporates.<br />

How to handle discs<br />

When removing a disc from its Center holder<br />

case, press down the center holder<br />

of the case and lift the disc out,<br />

holding it by the edges.<br />

• Always hold the disc by the edges.<br />

Do not touch its recording surface.<br />

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the<br />

disc around the center holder (with the printed surface<br />

facing up).<br />

• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.<br />

To keep discs clean<br />

A dirty disc may not play correctly.<br />

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with<br />

a soft cloth in a straight line from center<br />

to edge.<br />

• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional<br />

record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean<br />

discs.<br />

To play new discs<br />

New discs may have some rough spots<br />

around the inner and outer edges. If<br />

such a disc is used, this unit may reject<br />

the disc.<br />

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a<br />

pencil or ball-point pen, etc.<br />

Do not use the following discs:<br />

Warped disc<br />

Sticker<br />

Sticker residue<br />

Stick-on label<br />

Unusual shape<br />

Single CD (8 cm disc)<br />

ENGLISH<br />

15


ENGLISH<br />

16<br />

More about this unit<br />

Basic operations<br />

Turning on the power<br />

• By pressing SOURCE on the unit, you can also turn on<br />

the power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.<br />

Turning off the power<br />

• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc<br />

play will start from where playback has been stopped<br />

previously, next time you turn on the power.<br />

Tuner operations<br />

Storing stations in memory<br />

• During SSM search...<br />

– All previously stored stations are erased and<br />

stations are stored newly.<br />

– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest<br />

frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).<br />

– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will<br />

be automatically tuned in.<br />

• When storing a station manually, the previously<br />

preset station is erased when a new station is stored<br />

in the same preset number.<br />

FM RDS operations<br />

• Network-Tracking Reception requires two types of<br />

RDS signals—PI (Programme Identification) and AF<br />

(Alternative Frequency) to work correctly. Without<br />

receiving these data correctly, Network-Tracking<br />

Reception will not operate correctly.<br />

• If a Traffic Announcement is received by TA Standby<br />

Reception, the volume level automatically changes to<br />

the preset level (TA VOL) if the current level is lower<br />

than the preset level.<br />

• When Alternative Frequency Reception is activated<br />

(with AF selected), Network-Tracking Reception is<br />

also activated automatically. On the other hand,<br />

Network-Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated<br />

without deactivating Alternative Frequency<br />

Reception. (See page 12.)<br />

• If you want to know more about RDS, visit<br />

.<br />

Disc operations<br />

Caution for DualDisc playback<br />

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply<br />

with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.<br />

Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on<br />

this product may not be recommended.<br />

General<br />

• This unit has been designed to reproduce CDs/CD<br />

Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs (Rewritable)<br />

in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA formats.<br />

• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are<br />

used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”<br />

• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or<br />

WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.<br />

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW<br />

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.<br />

• This unit can play back only files of the same type<br />

which are first detected if a disc includes both audio<br />

CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.<br />

• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,<br />

unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.<br />

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on<br />

this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for<br />

the following reasons:<br />

– Discs are dirty or scratched.<br />

– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside<br />

the unit.<br />

– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.<br />

– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with<br />

“Packet Write” method.<br />

– There are improper recording conditions (missing<br />

data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,<br />

warped, etc.).<br />

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the<br />

reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular<br />

CDs.


• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:<br />

– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck<br />

to the surface.<br />

– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an<br />

ink jet printer.<br />

Using these discs under high temperatures or high<br />

humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the<br />

unit.<br />

Playing an MP3/WMA disc<br />

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the<br />

extension code or (regardless of<br />

the letter case—upper/lower).<br />

• This unit can show the names of albums, artists<br />

(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or<br />

2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.<br />

• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No<br />

other characters can be correctly displayed.<br />

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the<br />

conditions below:<br />

– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps<br />

– Sampling frequency:<br />

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)<br />

24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)<br />

– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,<br />

Joliet, Windows long file name<br />

• The maximum number of characters for file/folder<br />

names vary among the disc format used (includes 4<br />

extension characters— or ).<br />

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters<br />

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters<br />

– Romeo: up to 128 characters<br />

– Joliet: up to 64 characters<br />

– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters<br />

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200<br />

folders, and of 8 hierarchies.<br />

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable<br />

bit rate).<br />

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed<br />

time display, and do not show the actual elapsed<br />

time. Especially, after performing the search function,<br />

this difference becomes noticeable.<br />

• This unit cannot play back the following files:<br />

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.<br />

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.<br />

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.<br />

– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and<br />

voice format.<br />

– WMA files which are not based upon Windows<br />

Media® Audio.<br />

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.<br />

– Files which have the data such as WAVE, ATRAC3,<br />

etc.<br />

• The search function works but search speed is not<br />

constant.<br />

Changing the source<br />

• If you change the source, playback also stops<br />

(without ejecting the disc).<br />

Next time you select “DISC” for the playback source,<br />

disc play starts from where it has been stopped<br />

previously.<br />

Ejecting a disc<br />

• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,<br />

the disc is automatically inserted again into the<br />

loading slot to protect it from dust.<br />

• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you<br />

cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another<br />

disc or press SOURCE to select another playback<br />

source.<br />

General settings—PSM<br />

• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from<br />

“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level<br />

is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically<br />

changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”<br />

Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered<br />

trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation<br />

in the United States and/or other countries.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

17


ENGLISH<br />

18<br />

Troubleshooting<br />

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.<br />

General<br />

FM/AM<br />

Disc playback<br />

MP3/WMA playback<br />

Symptoms Remedies/Causes<br />

• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.<br />

• Check the cords and connections.<br />

• The unit does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).<br />

• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.<br />

• Static noise while listening to the radio. Connect the aerial firmly.<br />

• Disc cannot be played back. Insert the disc correctly.<br />

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.<br />

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be skipped.<br />

• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.<br />

• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you<br />

used for recording.<br />

• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 10).<br />

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).<br />

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.<br />

• Change the disc.<br />

• Check the cords and connections.<br />

• “NO DISC” appears on the display. Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.<br />

• Disc cannot be played back. • Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the format<br />

compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2, Romeo, or<br />

Joliet.<br />

• Add the extension code or to the file<br />

names.<br />

• Noise is generated. Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the<br />

extension code or to non-MP3 or WMA<br />

tracks.)<br />

• A longer readout time is required (“CHECK” Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.<br />

keeps flashing on the display).<br />

• Tracks are not played back in the order you Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.<br />

have intended.<br />

• Elapsed playing time is not correct. This sometimes occurs during play. This is caused by how<br />

the tracks are recorded on the disc.<br />

• “PLEASE EJECT” appears on the display. Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.<br />

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.<br />

album name).<br />

This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),<br />

numbers, and a limited number of symbols.


Specifications<br />

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION<br />

Maximum Power Output:<br />

Front/Rear: 50 W per channel<br />

Continuous Power Output (RMS):<br />

Front/Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω,<br />

40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more<br />

than 0.8% total harmonic<br />

distortion.<br />

Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)<br />

Tone Control Range:<br />

Bass: ±12 dB at 100 Hz<br />

Treble: ±12 dB at 10 kHz<br />

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz<br />

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB<br />

Line-Out Level/ 2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)<br />

Impedance:<br />

Output Impedance: 1 kΩ<br />

TUNER SECTION<br />

Frequency Range:<br />

FM1/FM2: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz<br />

FM3: 65.00 MHz to 74.00 MHZ<br />

AM: MW: 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz<br />

LW: 144 kHz to 279 kHz<br />

FM Tuner<br />

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)<br />

50 dB Quieting 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)<br />

Sensitivity:<br />

Alternate Channel 65 dB<br />

Selectivity (400 kHz):<br />

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz<br />

Stereo Separation: 30 dB<br />

MW Tuner<br />

Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB<br />

LW Tuner<br />

Sensitivity: 50 μV<br />

CD PLAYER SECTION<br />

Type: Compact disc player<br />

Signal Detection<br />

System:<br />

Non-contact optical pickup<br />

(semiconductor laser)<br />

Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)<br />

Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz<br />

Dynamic Range: 96 dB<br />

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB<br />

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit<br />

MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)<br />

Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps<br />

WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:<br />

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps<br />

GENERAL<br />

Power Requirement:<br />

Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V<br />

(11 V to 16 V allowance)<br />

Grounding System: Negative ground<br />

Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C<br />

Temperature:<br />

Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)<br />

Installation Size: 182 mm × 52 mm × 150 mm<br />

Panel Size: 187 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm<br />

Mass: 1.4 kg (excluding accessories)<br />

Design and specifications are subject to change without<br />

notice.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

19


Having TROUBLE with operation?<br />

Please reset your unit<br />

Refer to page of How to reset your unit<br />

Затруднения при эксплуатации?<br />

Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство<br />

Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства<br />

обратитесь на соответствующую страницу<br />

Маєте ПРОБЛЕМУ з функціонуванням?<br />

Повторно налаштуйте систему<br />

Див. сторінку “Як повторно налаштувати пристрій”<br />

EN, RU, UK<br />

© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited<br />

1006DTSMDTJEIN


GET0407-002A<br />

[EE]<br />

ENGLISH<br />

<strong>KD</strong>-G337<br />

Installation/Connection Manual<br />

Руководство по установке/подключению<br />

Керівництво зі встановлення та з’єднання<br />

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground<br />

electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a<br />

voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at <strong>JVC</strong> IN-CAR<br />

ENTERTAINMENT dealers.<br />

WARNINGS<br />

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the<br />

battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before<br />

installing the unit.<br />

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after<br />

installation.<br />

Notes:<br />

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows<br />

frequently, consult your <strong>JVC</strong> IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.<br />

• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum<br />

power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with<br />

an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than<br />

50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from<br />

being damaged (see page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS).<br />

• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads<br />

with insulating tape.<br />

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it<br />

when removing this unit.<br />

A / B<br />

Hard case/Control panel<br />

Жесткий футляр/панель<br />

управления<br />

Жорсткий футляр/Панель<br />

управління<br />

E<br />

Power cord<br />

Кабель питания<br />

Шнур живлення<br />

H<br />

Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)<br />

Крепежный болт (M5 × 20 мм)<br />

Монтажний болт (M5 × 20 мм)<br />

Heat sink<br />

Радиатор<br />

Радіатор<br />

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker<br />

connections:<br />

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the<br />

car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.<br />

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the<br />

speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.<br />

Parts list for installation and connection<br />

The following parts are provided for this unit.<br />

If any item is missing, consult your <strong>JVC</strong> IN-CAR<br />

ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.<br />

РУССКИЙ<br />

Это устройство разработано для эксплуатации на 12 В<br />

постоянного напряжения с минусом на массе. Если Ваш<br />

автомобиль не имеет этой системы, требуется инвертор<br />

напряжения, который может быть приобретен у дилера<br />

автомобилнего специалиста <strong>JVC</strong>.<br />

ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ<br />

Для предотвращения коротких замыканий мы рекомендуем<br />

Вам отсоединить отрицательный разъем аккумулятора и<br />

осуществить все подключения перед установкой устройства.<br />

• После установки обязательно заземлите данное<br />

устройство на шасси автомобиля.<br />

Примечания:<br />

• Заменяйте предохранитель другим предохранителем<br />

указанного класса. Если предохранитель сгорает слишком<br />

часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего специалиста <strong>JVC</strong>.<br />

• Рекомендуется подключать динамики с максимальной<br />

мощностью более 50 Вт (к задней и передней панели<br />

устройства, с полным сопротивлением от 4 Ω до 8 Ω). Если<br />

максимальная мощность динамиков менее 50 Вт, перейдите в<br />

режим “AMP GAIN”, чтобы предотвратить их повреждение (см.<br />

ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 13).<br />

• Для предотвращения короткого замыкания заклейте<br />

НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫЕ концы изолирующей лентой.<br />

• Радиатор во время использования сильно нагревается.<br />

Старайтесь его не трогать во время удаления устройства.<br />

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по питанию и<br />

подключению громкоговорителей:<br />

• НЕ подключайте провода громкоговорителей к<br />

аккумулятору автомобиля, иначе устройство будет<br />

повреждено.<br />

• ПЕРЕД подключением проводов громкоговорителей к кабелю<br />

питания громкоговорителя проверьте схему соединений<br />

громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.<br />

Список деталей для установки и<br />

подключения<br />

Следующие детали поставлены в комплекте с устройством.<br />

При отсутствии какого-либо элемента немедленно свяжитесь с<br />

дилером автомобильного специалиста <strong>JVC</strong>.<br />

C<br />

Sleeve<br />

Муфта<br />

Екран<br />

F<br />

Washer (ø5)<br />

Шайба (њ5)<br />

Шайба (ø5)<br />

I<br />

Rubber cushion<br />

Резиновый чехол<br />

Гумова прокладка<br />

1<br />

УКРАЇНА<br />

1006DTSMDTJEIN<br />

EN, RU, UK<br />

© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited<br />

Цей пристрій призначений для роботи під напругою 12 В<br />

постійного струму; з електричними системами, що мають<br />

заземлення ВІД’ЄМНОГО полюсу. Якщо ваше авто не<br />

оснащене такою системою, потрібно використовувати інвертор<br />

напруги, який можна придбати у дилерів устаткування <strong>JVC</strong> для<br />

автомобілів.<br />

ПОПЕРЕДЖЕННЯ<br />

Для запобігання коротким замиканням рекомендується<br />

перед встановленням пристрою відключити від’ємну клему<br />

акумулятора та виконати усі електричні з’єднання.<br />

• Переконайтеся у тому, що після закінчення встановлення<br />

пристрою, виконано його заземлення на шасі авто.<br />

Примітки:<br />

• Заміняти запобіжник можна тільки запобіжником із вказаними<br />

у специфікації номінальними характеристиками. Якщо<br />

запобіжники часто виходять з ладу, проконсультуйтеся з<br />

дилером устаткування <strong>JVC</strong> для автомобілів.<br />

• Рекомендується підключати гучномовці з максимальною<br />

потужністю, що перевищує 50 Вт (як для розташованих<br />

спереду, так і для тих, що розміщуються позаду.<br />

Рекомендований діапазон опору: від 4 до 8 Ом). У разі,<br />

якщо потужність є меншою чим 50 Вт, змініть налаштування<br />

“AMP GAIN” (коефіцієнт підсилення) задля запобігання<br />

пошкодженню гучномовців (див. с. 13 “ІНСТРУКЦІЇ”).<br />

• Для запобігання короткому замиканню, заізолюйте клеми<br />

провідника, ЩО НЕ ВИКОРИСТОВУЄТЬСЯ, ізоляційною<br />

стрічкою.<br />

• По закінчені роботи радіатор стає надто гарячим. Будьте<br />

обережні, не торкайтесь його при видалені цього пристрою.<br />

ЗАСТЕРЕЖЕННЯ щодо приєднання джерела<br />

живлення та гучномовців:<br />

• НЕ з’єднуйте провідники живлення гучномовців з<br />

акумулятором. Невиконання такої вимоги призведе до<br />

тяжкого ушкодження пристрою.<br />

• ПЕРЕД тим, як з’єднати провідники живлення з<br />

гучномовцями, перевірте схему з’єднання гучномовців<br />

вашого авто.<br />

Перелік деталей для встановлення та з’єднання<br />

У комплекті з цим пристроєм надаються такі деталі.<br />

Якщо будь-яка з цих деталей відсутня, негайно зверніться до<br />

дилера устаткування <strong>JVC</strong> для автомобілів.<br />

D<br />

Trim plate<br />

Декоративную панель<br />

Знімна пластина<br />

G<br />

Lock nut (M5)<br />

Фиксирующая гайка (M5)<br />

Стопорна гайка (М5)<br />

J<br />

Handles<br />

Рычаги<br />

Ручки


INSTALLATION<br />

(IN-DASH MOUNTING)<br />

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have<br />

any questions or require information regarding installation kits,<br />

consult your <strong>JVC</strong> IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company<br />

supplying kits.<br />

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed<br />

by a qualified technician.<br />

Removing the unit<br />

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.<br />

When using the optional stay / При использовании<br />

дополнительной стойки / Використання додаткової<br />

стійки (постачається за окремим замовленням)<br />

Dashboard<br />

Приборная панель<br />

Приладова панель<br />

Fire wall<br />

Стена<br />

Вогнестійка стінка<br />

* 1 When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the<br />

rear.<br />

* 2 Not supplied for this unit.<br />

УСТАНОВКА (УСТАНОВКА В<br />

ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ)<br />

На следующих иллюстрациях показана типовая установка.<br />

Если у Вас есть какие-либо вопросы, касающиеся установки,<br />

обратитесь к Вашему дилеру автомобилнего специалиста<br />

<strong>JVC</strong> или в компанию, поставляющую соответствующие<br />

принадлежности.<br />

• Если Вы не знаете точно, как следует устанавливать это<br />

устройство, обратитесь к квалифицированному специалисту.<br />

Stay (option)<br />

Стойка (дополнительно)<br />

Стійка (на замовлення)<br />

Screw (option)<br />

Винт (дополнительно)<br />

Гвинт (на замовлення)<br />

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.<br />

Установите устройство под углом менее 30°.<br />

Встановіть пристрій під кутом меншим, ніж 30˚.<br />

Удаление устройства<br />

Перед удалением устройства освободите заднюю часть.<br />

2<br />

Do the required electrical connections.<br />

Выполните необходимые подключения<br />

контактов, как показано на оборотной<br />

стороне этой инструкции.<br />

Виконайте потрібні електричні<br />

з’єднання.<br />

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / При установке устройства<br />

без использования муфты / Встановлення пристрою без екрану<br />

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.<br />

В автомобиле Тойота, например, сначала извлеките автомобильный радиоприемник и установите устройство<br />

на место.<br />

У таких авто, як, наприклад, “Тойота”, спершу зніміть радіоприймач, а на його місце встановіть пристрій.<br />

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm) * 2<br />

Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм) * 2<br />

Гвинти з пласкими голівками (M5 × 8 мм) * 2<br />

Pocket<br />

Карман<br />

Карман<br />

Insert the two handles, then pull them as<br />

illustrated so that the unit can be removed.<br />

Вставьте два рычажка, затем потяните их,<br />

как показано на рисунке, чтобы вынуть<br />

устройство.<br />

Вставте дві ручки, а потім потягніть їх на<br />

себе згідно з ілюстрацією, щоби витягти<br />

пристрій.<br />

Bracket * 2<br />

Кронштейн * 2<br />

Кронштейн * 2<br />

ВСТАНОВЛЕННЯ<br />

(МОНТАЖ НА ПРИЛАДОВУ ПАНЕЛЬ)<br />

Наведена нижче ілюстрація демонструє типовий процес<br />

встановлення. У разі будь яких запитань або потреби у<br />

інформації щодо набору інструментів та спорядження,<br />

проконсультуйтеся з дилером устаткування <strong>JVC</strong> для автомобілів<br />

або з компанією, що постачає набір інструментів та спорядження.<br />

• Якщо ви не впевнені щодо правильності встановлення цього<br />

пристрою, залучіть до його встановлення кваліфікованого<br />

спеціаліста.<br />

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the<br />

sleeve firmly in place.<br />

Отогните соответствующие<br />

фиксаторы, предназначенные для<br />

прочной установки корпуса.<br />

Зігніть відповідні фіксатори для<br />

надійного встановлення екрану на<br />

його місці.<br />

Видалення пристрою<br />

Перед видаленням пристрою, ослабте кріплення тильної частини.<br />

Bracket * 2<br />

Кронштейн * 2<br />

Кронштейн * 2<br />

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm) * 2<br />

Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм) * 2<br />

Гвинти з пласкими голівками (M5 × 8 мм) * 2<br />

Note : When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer<br />

screws are used, they could damage the unit.<br />

Примечание : При установке устройства на крепежный кронштейн, используйте только винты длиной<br />

8 мм. При использовании более длинных винтов можно повредить устройство.<br />

Примітка : Встановлюючи пристрій на монтажні кронштейни, переконайтеся, що застосовуються гвинти<br />

довжиною 8 мм. Якщо гвинти довші, вони можуть пошкодити пристрій.<br />

* 1 Устанавливайте устройство таким образом, чтобы не повредить<br />

предохранитель, расположенный сзади.<br />

* 2 Hе входит в комплект поставки.<br />

* 1 При встановленні пристрою, будьте обережні, не пошкодьте<br />

запобіжник, розташований у тильній частині.<br />

* 2 Не входить до комплекту постачання цього пристрою.


ENGLISH<br />

A<br />

B<br />

If your car is equipped with the ISO connector /<br />

Если автомобиль оснащен разъемом ISO /<br />

Якщо ваше авто оснащене розніманням за<br />

стандартом ISO<br />

• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.<br />

• Подключите разъемы ISO, как показано на рисунке.<br />

• Приєднайте рознімання ISO, як рекомендовано на ілюстрації.<br />

View from the lead side<br />

Вид со стороны выводов<br />

Вид зі сторони електричних виводів<br />

From the car body<br />

От корпуса автомобиля<br />

Від корпусу авто<br />

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.<br />

Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.<br />

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car<br />

body may be different in color.<br />

1 Cut the ISO connector.<br />

2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order<br />

specified in the illustration below.<br />

3 Connect the aerial cord.<br />

4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.<br />

РУССКИЙ<br />

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ<br />

A<br />

C<br />

E F<br />

G<br />

B<br />

D<br />

H<br />

I J<br />

K L<br />

M N<br />

O<br />

P<br />

For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Для некоторых автомобилей VW/Audi<br />

или Opel (Vauxhall) / Для деяких авто марки VW/Audi або Opel (Vauxhall)<br />

You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.<br />

• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.<br />

Возможно, потребуется изменить схему соединений для прилагаемого шнура питания, как показано на рисунке.<br />

• Перед установкой приемника обратитесь к авторизованному агенту по продажам автомобильных систем.<br />

Вам, можливо, прийдеться внести зміни до з’єднання провідників шнура живлення згідно з ілюстрацією.<br />

• Перед тим, як встановлювати цей пристрій, зв’яжіться з уповноваженим дилером вашого авто.<br />

Original wiring / Исходная схема соединений / Початкова<br />

схема з’єднання рознімань<br />

ISO connector<br />

Разъем ISO<br />

Рознімання ISO<br />

Y: Yellow<br />

Желтый<br />

Жовтий<br />

R: Red<br />

Красный<br />

Червоний<br />

3<br />

Modified wiring 1 / Преобразованная схема соединений 1 / Змінена схема<br />

з’єднання рознімань 1<br />

Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.<br />

Если приемник не включается, используйте преобразованную схему соединений 2.<br />

Якщо пристрій не включається, скористуйтеся зміненою схемою з’єднання<br />

рознімань 2.<br />

Modified wiring 2 / Преобразованная схема соединений 2 / Змінена схема<br />

з’єднання рознімань 2<br />

Connections without using the ISO connectors / Подключение без использования разъемов ISO / З’єднання без допомоги рознімань ISO<br />

Rear ground terminal<br />

Задний разъем<br />

заземления<br />

Тильна клема<br />

заземлення<br />

Aerial terminal<br />

Разъем антенны<br />

Рознімання антени<br />

White with black stripe<br />

Белый с черной полосой<br />

Білий з чорною смужкою<br />

ISO connector of the supplied power cord<br />

Разъем ISO шнура питания, входящего в<br />

комплект поставки<br />

Рознімання ISO шнура живлення, що<br />

входить до комплекту постачання<br />

Line out (see diagram )<br />

К выходу (см. схему )<br />

Лінійний вихід (див. схему )<br />

White<br />

Белый<br />

Білий<br />

Gray with black stripe<br />

Серый с черной полосой<br />

Сірий з чорною смужкою<br />

Left speaker (front)<br />

Левый громкоговоритель (передний)<br />

Лівий гучномовець (передній)<br />

* 1 Not supplied for this unit.<br />

* 2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead<br />

must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.<br />

Перед началом подключений: Тщательно проверьте<br />

проводку в автомобиле. Неправильное подключение может<br />

привести к серьезному повреждению устройства.<br />

Жилы силового кабеля и жилы соединителя от кузова<br />

автомобиля могут быть разного цвета.<br />

1 Обрежьте разъем ISO.<br />

2 Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания в указанном<br />

ниже порядке.<br />

3 Подключите кабель антенны.<br />

4 В последнюю очередь подключите электропроводку к устройству.<br />

Black<br />

Черный<br />

Чорний<br />

Yellow * 2<br />

Желтый * 2<br />

Жовтий * 2<br />

Red<br />

Красный<br />

Червоний<br />

15 A fuse<br />

Предохранитель 15 A<br />

Запобіжник 15 А<br />

Blue with white stripe<br />

Синий с белой полосой<br />

Синій з білою смужкою<br />

Brown<br />

Коричневый<br />

Коричневий<br />

Gray<br />

Серый<br />

Сірий<br />

To metallic body or chassis of the car<br />

К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля<br />

На металічний корпус або на шасі авто<br />

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the<br />

ignition switch) (constant 12 V)<br />

К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя (минуя блок зажигания)<br />

(постоянный 12 В)<br />

На клему фази у блоці запобіжників для з’єднання з акумулятором авто<br />

(обминаючи перемикач запалення)—постійний струм 12 В<br />

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block<br />

К вспомогательному разъему в блоке предохранителя<br />

На допоміжну клему у блоці запобіжників<br />

Green with black stripe<br />

Зеленый с черной полосой<br />

Зелений з чорною смужкою<br />

Right speaker (front)<br />

Правый громкоговоритель (передний)<br />

Правий гучномовець (передній)<br />

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)<br />

К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны (макс. 200 мА)<br />

На провідник зовнішнього пристрою іншого обладнання або на антену (якщо<br />

встановлена) (максимальний струм 200 мА)<br />

To cellular phone system<br />

К системе сотового телефона<br />

На систему стільникового телефону<br />

Green<br />

Зеленый<br />

Зелений<br />

* 1 Hе входит в комплект поставки.<br />

* 2 Перед проверкой работы устройства подключите этот провод,<br />

иначе питание не включится.<br />

УКРАЇНА<br />

ЕЛЕКТРИЧНІ З’ЄДНАННЯ<br />

Перед тим, як з’єднати: Уважно перевірте електричну<br />

схему з’єднання вашого авто Неправильне з’єднання може<br />

спричинити тяжке пошкодження вашого пристрою.<br />

Контакти шнура живлення та рознімання, яке йде від корпуса<br />

авто можуть мати різні кольори.<br />

1 Від’єднайте рознімання ISO.<br />

2 З’єднайте кольорові провідники шнура живлення у порядку,<br />

що наведений нижче на ілюстрації.<br />

3 Приєднайте провід антени.<br />

4 Виконайте кінцеве приєднання джгута провідників до пристрою.<br />

Purple with black stripe<br />

Пурпурный с черной полосой<br />

Пурпурний з чорною смужкою<br />

Left speaker (rear)<br />

Левый громкоговоритель (задний)<br />

Лівий гучномовець (задній)<br />

Ignition switch<br />

Переключатель зажигания<br />

Перемикач запалювання<br />

Fuse block<br />

Блок предохранителя<br />

Блок запобіжників<br />

Purple<br />

Пурпурный<br />

Пурпурний<br />

Right speaker (rear)<br />

Правый громкоговоритель<br />

(задний)<br />

Правий гучномовець (задній)<br />

* 1 Не входить до комплекту постачання цього пристрою.<br />

* 2 Перед тим, як перевірити працездатність цього виробу до його<br />

встановлення, цей контакт необхідно приєднати, інакше живлення<br />

на прилад подаватися не буде.


C<br />

Connecting the external amplifier / Подключение внешнего усилителя / З’єднання із зовнішнім підсилювачем<br />

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.<br />

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote<br />

lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through<br />

this unit.<br />

• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to<br />

the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.<br />

Rear speakers<br />

Задние<br />

громкоговорители<br />

Задні гучномовці<br />

<strong>JVC</strong> Amplifier<br />

<strong>JVC</strong>-усилитель<br />

Підсилювач <strong>JVC</strong><br />

* 3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis<br />

of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint,<br />

remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may<br />

cause damage to the unit.<br />

* 4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit).<br />

* 5 Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO connector and connect<br />

them to the amplifier.<br />

TROUBLESHOOTING<br />

• The fuse blows.<br />

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?<br />

• Power cannot be turned on.<br />

* Is the yellow lead connected?<br />

• No sound from the speakers.<br />

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?<br />

• Sound is distorted.<br />

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?<br />

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?<br />

• Noise interfere with sounds.<br />

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using<br />

shorter and thicker cords?<br />

• This unit becomes hot.<br />

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?<br />

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?<br />

• This unit does not work at all.<br />

* Have you reset your unit?<br />

Можно подключить усилитель для обновления автомобильной<br />

стереосистемы.<br />

• Подсоедините провод внешнего устройства (синий с<br />

белой полосой) к проводу внешнего устройства другого<br />

оборудования так, чтобы им можно было управлять с этого<br />

устройства.<br />

• Отсоедините громкоговорители от данного<br />

устройства, подключите их к усилителю. Оставьте<br />

провода громкоговорителей данного устройства<br />

неиспользованными.<br />

BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ<br />

• Сработал предохранитель.<br />

* Правильно ли подключены черный и красный провода?<br />

• Питание не включается.<br />

* Подключен ли желтый провод?<br />

• Звук не выводится через громкоговорители.<br />

* Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле выхода<br />

громкоговорителей?<br />

• Звук искажен.<br />

* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?<br />

* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)<br />

громкоговорителей?<br />

• Шум мешает звучанию.<br />

* Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим заземления с шасси<br />

автомобиля с помощью более короткого и тонкого шнуров?<br />

• Устройство нагревается.<br />

* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?<br />

* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)<br />

громкоговорителей?<br />

• Приемник не работает.<br />

* Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?<br />

4<br />

Remote lead<br />

Провод внешнего устройства<br />

Провідник зовнішнього пристрою<br />

* 3 Плотно прикрепите заземляющий провод к металлическому<br />

кузову или шасси автомобиля—в месте, не покрытом краской<br />

(если оно покрыто краской, удалите краску перед тем, как<br />

прикреплять провод). Невыполнение этого требования может<br />

привести к повреждению данного устройства.<br />

* 4 Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект поставки).<br />

* 5 Отрежьте провода задних громкоговорителей разъема ISO и<br />

подсоеди ните их к усилителю.<br />

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)<br />

Провод внешнего устройства (Синий с белой полосой)<br />

Провідник зовнішнього пристрою (синій з білою смужкою)<br />

Для покращення характеристик стереосистеми, до неї можна<br />

підключити підсилювач.<br />

• Підключіть провідник зовнішнього пристрою (синій з білою<br />

смужкою) до провідника зовнішнього пристрою іншого<br />

обладнання. Таким чином, ним можна буде керувати з цього<br />

пристрою.<br />

• Відключіть гучномовці від цього пристрою, приєднайте<br />

їх до підсилювача. Залиште провідники гучномовців<br />

такими, що не використовуються.<br />

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)<br />

Разъем Y (не входит в комплект поставки)<br />

Y-рознімання (двійник) (не входить до комплекту<br />

постачання даного пристрою)<br />

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any<br />

К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны<br />

На провідник зовнішнього пристрою іншого обладнання або на антену (якщо встановлена)<br />

Rear speakers<br />

Задние громкоговорители<br />

Задні гучномовці<br />

Front speakers (see diagram )<br />

Передние громкоговорители (см. схему )<br />

Передні гучномовці (див. схему )<br />

* 3 Надійно прикрутіть провідник заземлення до металічного<br />

корпусу або до шасі авто у місці, яке не має фарбового покриття<br />

(якщо воно є, видаліть фарбу до підключення провідника).<br />

Невиконання цієї вимоги може призвести до пошкодження<br />

пристрою.<br />

* 4 Сигнальний шнур (не входить до комплекту постачання даного<br />

пристрою).<br />

* 5 Відключіть провідники задніх гучномовців від рознімання ISO,<br />

що належить до авто, та з’єднайте їх із підсилювачем.<br />

НЕСПРАВНОСТІ<br />

• Вийшов з ладу запобіжник.<br />

* Чи правильно приєднані червоний та чорний провідники?<br />

• Не можна включити живлення.<br />

* Чи приєднаний жовтий провідник?<br />

• Звук з гучномовців відсутній.<br />

* Чи не замкнуто “на коротко” вихідні провідники гучномовця?<br />

• Звук спотворений.<br />

* Чи не заземлені вихідні провідники гучномовця?<br />

* Чи заземлені разом провідники “–” лівого та правого<br />

гучномовця?<br />

• Звук чути з перешкодами.<br />

* Чи приєднано тильну клему заземлення до шасі авто за<br />

допомогою коротших та товстіших шнурів?<br />

• Пристрій нагрівається.<br />

* Чи не заземлені вихідні провідники гучномовця?<br />

* Чи заземлені разом провідники “–” лівого та правого<br />

гучномовця?<br />

• Цей пристрій не працює взагалі.<br />

* Чи ви переналаштовували пристрій?


CD RECEIVER <strong>KD</strong>-G335<br />

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.<br />

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.<br />

INSTRUCTIONS<br />

<strong>KD</strong>-G335<br />

GET0402-005A<br />

[UT]<br />

ENGLISH


ENGLISH<br />

2<br />

Thank you for purchasing a <strong>JVC</strong> product.<br />

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best<br />

possible performance from the unit.<br />

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS<br />

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT<br />

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to<br />

qualified service personnel.<br />

3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical<br />

instruments.<br />

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.<br />

Warning:<br />

[European Union only]<br />

If you need to operate the unit while driving, be<br />

sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved<br />

in a traffic accident.<br />

Caution on volume setting:<br />

Discs produce very little noise compared with other<br />

sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc<br />

to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden<br />

increase of the output level.<br />

How to reset your unit<br />

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.<br />

How to forcibly eject a disc<br />

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.<br />

• If this does not work, reset your unit.


How to use the M MODE button<br />

If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions<br />

mode, then the number buttons and ¢/4<br />

buttons work as different function buttons.<br />

Ex.: When number button 2 works as<br />

MO (monaural) button.<br />

To use these buttons for their original functions<br />

again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds<br />

without pressing any of these buttons until the<br />

functions mode is cleared or press M MODE again.<br />

Detaching the control panel<br />

Attaching the control panel<br />

CONTENTS<br />

Control panel .................................. 4<br />

Remote controller — RM-RK50 ........... 5<br />

Getting started ................................ 6<br />

Basic operations ................................................... 6<br />

Radio operations ............................. 7<br />

Disc operations ................................ 8<br />

Playing a disc in the unit ..................................... 8<br />

Sound adjustments .......................... 10<br />

General settings — PSM .................. 11<br />

Maintenance ................................... 13<br />

More about this unit ........................ 14<br />

Troubleshooting .............................. 16<br />

Specifications .................................. 17<br />

For safety...<br />

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will<br />

block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.<br />

• Stop the car before performing any complicated<br />

operations.<br />

Temperature inside the car...<br />

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold<br />

weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes<br />

normal before operating the unit.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

3


ENGLISH<br />

4<br />

Control panel<br />

Display window<br />

1 0 (eject) button<br />

2 Loading slot<br />

3 (standby/on/attenuator) button<br />

4 Remote sensor<br />

DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light<br />

(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).<br />

5 SOURCE button<br />

6 Display window<br />

7 BAND button<br />

8 EQ (equalizer) button<br />

9 ¢/4 buttons<br />

p Control dial<br />

q SEL (select) button<br />

w DISP (display) button<br />

e MO (monaural) button<br />

r SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button<br />

t Number buttons<br />

y RPT (repeat) button<br />

Parts identification<br />

u RND (random) button<br />

i M MODE button<br />

o (control panel release) button<br />

; Disc information indicators—<br />

TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)<br />

a DISC indicator<br />

s Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),<br />

(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)<br />

d Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),<br />

ST (stereo)<br />

f S.BASS (super bass) indicator<br />

g EQ (equalizer) indicator<br />

h Tr (track) indicator<br />

j Source display / Volume level indicator / Time<br />

countdown indicator<br />

k Main display<br />

l Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)<br />

indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,<br />

USER


Remote controller — RM-RK50<br />

Installing the lithium coin battery<br />

(CR2025)<br />

Aim the remote controller directly at the remote<br />

sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle<br />

in between.<br />

Warning:<br />

• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or<br />

its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.<br />

• Do not leave the remote controller in a place<br />

(such as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight<br />

for a long time; otherwise, it may explode.<br />

• Store the battery in a place where children<br />

cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.<br />

• To prevent the battery from over-heating,<br />

cracking, or starting a fire:<br />

– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the<br />

battery, or dispose of it in a fire.<br />

– Do not leave the battery with other metallic<br />

materials.<br />

– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar<br />

tools.<br />

– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when<br />

throwing away or saving it.<br />

Main elements and features<br />

1 (standby/on/attenuator) button<br />

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or<br />

attenuates the sound when the power is on.<br />

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.<br />

2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons<br />

• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.<br />

• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.<br />

• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.<br />

3 VOL – / VOL + buttons<br />

• Adjusts the volume level.<br />

4 SOUND button<br />

• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent<br />

equalizer).<br />

5 SOURCE button<br />

• Selects the source.<br />

6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons<br />

• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.<br />

• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and<br />

held.<br />

• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

5


ENGLISH<br />

6<br />

Getting started<br />

Basic operations<br />

~ Turn on the power.<br />

Ÿ<br />

* You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if<br />

there is no disc in the unit.<br />

! For FM/AM tuner<br />

⁄ Adjust the volume.<br />

@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See<br />

pages 10 and 11.)<br />

To drop the volume in a<br />

moment (ATT)<br />

To restore the sound, press the<br />

button again.<br />

To turn off the power<br />

Volume level appears.<br />

Basic settings<br />

• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 11 and<br />

12.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

1 Canceling the display demonstrations<br />

Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”<br />

2 Setting the clock<br />

Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.<br />

Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the<br />

minute.<br />

3 Finish the procedure.<br />

To check the current clock time while the<br />

power is turned off<br />

Clock time is shown on the<br />

display for about 5 seconds. See<br />

also page 12.


Radio operations<br />

~<br />

Ÿ<br />

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo<br />

broadcast with sufficient signal strength.<br />

! Start searching for a station.<br />

When a station is received,<br />

searching stops.<br />

To stop searching, press the<br />

same button again.<br />

To tune in to a station manually<br />

In step ! above...<br />

1<br />

2 Select a desired station frequency.<br />

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to<br />

receive<br />

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.<br />

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same<br />

procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator<br />

goes off.<br />

Storing stations in memory<br />

You can preset six stations for each band.<br />

FM station automatic presetting —<br />

SSM (Strong-station Sequential<br />

Memory)<br />

1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to<br />

store into.<br />

2<br />

3<br />

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.<br />

“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic<br />

presetting is over.<br />

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are<br />

searched and stored automatically in the FM band.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

7


ENGLISH<br />

8<br />

Manual presetting<br />

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number<br />

4 of the FM1 band.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

1<br />

Preset number flashes for a while.<br />

Listening to a preset station<br />

2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.<br />

To check the other information while<br />

listening to an FM or AM station<br />

Clock Ô Frequency<br />

Disc operations<br />

Playing a disc in the unit<br />

~ Turn on the power.<br />

Ÿ<br />

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you<br />

change the source or eject the disc.<br />

To stop play and eject the<br />

disc<br />

• Press SOURCE to listen to<br />

another playback source.<br />

To fast-forward or reverse<br />

the track<br />

To go to the next or<br />

previous tracks<br />

To go to the next or previous folders (only<br />

for MP3 or WMA discs)


To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder<br />

(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly<br />

To select a number from 01 – 06:<br />

To select a number from 07 – 12:<br />

• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it<br />

is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit<br />

numbers at the beginning of their folder names—<br />

01, 02, 03, and so on.<br />

To select a particular track in a<br />

folder (for MP3 or WMA disc):<br />

Prohibiting disc ejection<br />

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.<br />

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same<br />

procedure.<br />

Changing the display information<br />

While playing an audio CD or a<br />

CD Text<br />

While playing an MP3 or a WMA disc<br />

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”<br />

(see page 12)<br />

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”<br />

: Clock with the current track number<br />

: Elapsed playing time with the current<br />

track number<br />

: Corresponding indicator lights up on the<br />

display<br />

* 1 If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.<br />

* 2 If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,<br />

folder name and file name appear. In this case, the<br />

TAG indicator will not light up.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

9


ENGLISH<br />

10<br />

Selecting the playback modes<br />

You can use only one of the following playback modes<br />

at a time.<br />

1<br />

2 Select your desired playback mode.<br />

7 Repeat play<br />

Mode Plays repeatedly<br />

TRK RPT : The current track.<br />

FLDR RPT * : All tracks of the current folder.<br />

RPT OFF : Cancels.<br />

7 Random play<br />

Mode Plays at random<br />

FLDR RND * : All tracks of the current folder,<br />

then tracks of the next folder and<br />

so on.<br />

DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc.<br />

RND OFF : Cancels.<br />

* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.<br />

: Corresponding indicator lights up on<br />

the display<br />

Sound adjustments<br />

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the<br />

music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).<br />

BAS*<br />

Indication (For)<br />

1 MID* 2 TRE* 3 S.BS* 4<br />

Preset values<br />

USER<br />

(Flat sound)<br />

00 00 00 OFF<br />

ROCK<br />

(Rock or disco music)<br />

+03 00 +02 ON<br />

CLASSIC<br />

(Classical music)<br />

+01 00 +03 OFF<br />

POPS<br />

(Light music)<br />

+02 +01 +02 OFF<br />

HIP HOP<br />

(Funk or rap music)<br />

+04 –02 +01 ON<br />

JAZZ<br />

(Jazz music)<br />

+03 00 +03 OFF<br />

* 1 : Bass; * 2 : Middle; * 3 : Treble; * 4 : Super bass<br />

Adjusting the sound<br />

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your<br />

preference.<br />

1<br />

2


Indication, [Range]<br />

BAS * 2 (bass), [–06 to +06]<br />

Adjust the bass.<br />

MID * 2 (middle), [–06 to +06]<br />

Adjust the middle frequencies sound level.<br />

TRE * 2 (treble), [–06 to +06]<br />

Adjust the treble.<br />

FAD * 3 (fader), [R06 to F06]<br />

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.<br />

BAL * 4 (balance), [L06 to R06]<br />

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.<br />

S.BS * 2 (super bass), [S.BS ON or S.BS OFF], [01 to 05]* 5<br />

Maintain the richness and fullness of the bass sound<br />

regardless of how low you set the volume.<br />

SUB.W (subwoofer), [00 to 08]<br />

Adjust the subwoofer output level.<br />

VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50 * 6 ]<br />

Adjust the volume.<br />

* 1 Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER”<br />

(see page 12).<br />

* 2 When you adjust the bass, middle, treble, or super<br />

bass, the adjustment you have made is stored for the<br />

currently selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”<br />

* 3 If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader<br />

level to “00.”<br />

* 4 The adjustment cannot affect the subwoofer output.<br />

* 5 Range adjustment for super bass is adjustable only<br />

when it is set to “S.BS ON.”<br />

* 6 Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See<br />

page 12 for details.)<br />

General settings — PSM<br />

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items<br />

listed in the table that follows.<br />

1<br />

2 Select a PSM item.<br />

3 Adjust the PSM item selected.<br />

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM<br />

items if necessary.<br />

5 Finish the procedure.<br />

Continued on the next page<br />

ENGLISH<br />

11


ENGLISH<br />

12<br />

Indications Item<br />

( : Initial)<br />

DEMO<br />

Display demonstration<br />

CLK DISP * 1<br />

Clock display<br />

CLOCK H<br />

Hour adjustment<br />

CLOCK M<br />

Minute adjustment<br />

DIMMER<br />

Dimmer<br />

SCROLL * 2<br />

Scroll<br />

WOOFER * 3<br />

Subwoofer cutoff<br />

frequency<br />

L/O MODE<br />

Line output mode<br />

TAG DISP<br />

Tag display<br />

AMP GAIN<br />

Amplifier gain control<br />

• DEMO ON<br />

• DEMO OFF<br />

• ON<br />

• OFF<br />

Selectable settings, [reference page]<br />

: Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no<br />

operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is<br />

turned off.<br />

: Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about<br />

5 seconds when the power is turned off, [6].<br />

1 – 12 [Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6]<br />

00 – 59 [Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6]<br />

• ON<br />

• OFF<br />

• ONCE<br />

• AUTO<br />

• OFF<br />

• LOW<br />

• MID<br />

• HIGH<br />

• REAR<br />

• WOOFER<br />

• TAG ON<br />

• TAG OFF<br />

• LOW PWR<br />

• HIGH PWR<br />

: Dims the display illumination.<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: Scrolls the disc information once.<br />

: Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).<br />

: Cancels.<br />

• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display<br />

regardless of the setting.<br />

: Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.<br />

: Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.<br />

: Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.<br />

: Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the<br />

speakers (through an external amplifier).<br />

: Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a<br />

subwoofer (through an external amplifier).<br />

: Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [9].<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the<br />

speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from damaging the<br />

speaker.)<br />

: VOL 00 – VOL 50<br />

* 1 If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF” to<br />

save the car’s battery.<br />

* 2 Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.<br />

* 3 Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”


Maintenance<br />

How to clean the connectors<br />

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.<br />

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the<br />

connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with<br />

alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.<br />

Connector<br />

Moisture condensation<br />

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in<br />

the following cases:<br />

• After starting the heater in the car.<br />

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.<br />

Should this occur, the unit malfunction. In this case,<br />

eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few<br />

hours until the moisture evaporates.<br />

How to handle discs<br />

When removing a disc from its Center holder<br />

case, press down the center holder<br />

of the case and lift the disc out,<br />

holding it by the edges.<br />

• Always hold the disc by the edges.<br />

Do not touch its recording surface.<br />

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the<br />

disc around the center holder (with the printed surface<br />

facing up).<br />

• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.<br />

To keep discs clean<br />

A dirty disc may not play correctly.<br />

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with<br />

a soft cloth in a straight line from center<br />

to edge.<br />

• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional<br />

record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean<br />

discs.<br />

To play new discs<br />

New discs may have some rough spots<br />

around the inner and outer edges. If<br />

such a disc is used, this unit may reject<br />

the disc.<br />

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a<br />

pencil or ball-point pen, etc.<br />

Do not use the following discs:<br />

Warped disc<br />

Sticker<br />

Sticker residue<br />

Stick-on label<br />

Unusual shape<br />

Single CD (8 cm disc)<br />

ENGLISH<br />

13


ENGLISH<br />

14<br />

More about this unit<br />

Basic operations<br />

Turning on the power<br />

• By pressing SOURCE on the unit, you can also turn on<br />

the power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.<br />

Turning off the power<br />

• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc<br />

play will start from where playback has been stopped<br />

previously, next time you turn on the power.<br />

Tuner operations<br />

Storing stations in memory<br />

• During SSM search...<br />

– All previously stored stations are erased and<br />

stations are stored newly.<br />

– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest<br />

frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).<br />

– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will<br />

be automatically tuned in.<br />

• When storing a station manually, the previously<br />

preset station is erased when a new station is stored<br />

in the same preset number.<br />

Disc operations<br />

Caution for DualDisc playback<br />

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply<br />

with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.<br />

Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on<br />

this product may not be recommended.<br />

General<br />

• This unit has been designed to reproduce<br />

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs<br />

(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA<br />

formats.<br />

• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are<br />

used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”<br />

• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or<br />

WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.<br />

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW<br />

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.<br />

• This unit can play back only files of the same type<br />

which are first detected if a disc includes both audio<br />

CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.<br />

• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,<br />

unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.<br />

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on<br />

this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for<br />

the following reasons:<br />

– Discs are dirty or scratched.<br />

– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside<br />

the unit.<br />

– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.<br />

– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with<br />

“Packet Write” method.<br />

– There are improper recording conditions (missing<br />

data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,<br />

warped, etc.).<br />

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the<br />

reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular<br />

CDs.<br />

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:<br />

– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck<br />

to the surface.<br />

– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an<br />

ink jet printer.<br />

Using these discs under high temperatures or high<br />

humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the<br />

unit.<br />

Playing an MP3/WMA disc<br />

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the<br />

extension code or (regardless of<br />

the letter case—upper/lower).<br />

• This unit can show the names of albums, artists<br />

(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or<br />

2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.


• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No<br />

other characters can be correctly displayed.<br />

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the<br />

conditions below:<br />

– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps<br />

– Sampling frequency:<br />

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)<br />

24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)<br />

– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,<br />

Joliet, Windows long file name<br />

• The maximum number of characters for file/folder<br />

names vary among the disc format used (includes 4<br />

extension characters— or ).<br />

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters<br />

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters<br />

– Romeo: up to 64 characters<br />

– Joliet: up to 32 characters<br />

– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters<br />

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200<br />

folders, and of 8 hierarchies.<br />

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable<br />

bit rate).<br />

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed<br />

time display, and do not show the actual elapsed<br />

time. Especially, after performing the search function,<br />

this difference becomes noticeable.<br />

• This unit cannot play back the following files:<br />

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.<br />

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.<br />

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.<br />

– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and<br />

voice format.<br />

– WMA files which are not based upon Windows<br />

Media® Audio.<br />

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.<br />

– Files which have the data such as WAVE, ATRAC3,<br />

etc.<br />

• The search function works but search speed is not<br />

constant.<br />

Changing the source<br />

• If you change the source, playback also stops<br />

(without ejecting the disc).<br />

Next time you select “CD” for the playback source,<br />

disc play starts from where it has been stopped<br />

previously.<br />

Ejecting a disc<br />

• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,<br />

the disc is automatically inserted again into the<br />

loading slot to protect it from dust.<br />

• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you<br />

cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another<br />

disc or press SOURCE to select another playback<br />

source.<br />

General settings—PSM<br />

• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from<br />

“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level<br />

is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically<br />

changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”<br />

Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered<br />

trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation<br />

in the United States and/or other countries.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

15


ENGLISH<br />

16<br />

Troubleshooting<br />

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.<br />

General<br />

FM/AM<br />

Disc playback<br />

MP3/WMA playback<br />

Symptoms Remedies/Causes<br />

• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.<br />

• Check the cords and connections.<br />

• The unit does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).<br />

• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.<br />

• Static noise while listening to the radio. Connect the antenna firmly.<br />

• Disc cannot be played back. Insert the disc correctly.<br />

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.<br />

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be<br />

skipped.<br />

• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.<br />

• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you<br />

used for recording.<br />

• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).<br />

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).<br />

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.<br />

• Change the disc.<br />

• Check the cords and connections.<br />

• “NO DISC” appears on the display. Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.<br />

• Disc cannot be played back. • Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the<br />

format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2,<br />

Romeo, or Joliet.<br />

• Add the extension code or to the<br />

file names.<br />

• Noise is generated. Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the<br />

extension code or to non-MP3 or<br />

WMA tracks.)<br />

• A longer readout time is required (“CHECK” Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.<br />

keeps flashing on the display).<br />

• Tracks are not played back in the order you Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.<br />

have intended.<br />

• Elapsed playing time is not correct. This sometimes occurs during play. This is caused by how<br />

the tracks are recorded on the disc.<br />

• “PLEASE EJECT” appears on the display. Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.<br />

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.<br />

album name).<br />

This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),<br />

numbers, and a limited number of symbols.


Specifications<br />

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION<br />

Maximum Power Output:<br />

Front/Rear: 50 W per channel<br />

Continuous Power Output (RMS):<br />

Front/Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω,<br />

40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more<br />

than 0.8% total harmonic<br />

distortion.<br />

Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)<br />

Tone Control Range:<br />

Bass: ±12 dB at 60 Hz<br />

Middle: ±12 dB at 1 kHz<br />

Treble: ±12 dB at 7.5 kHz<br />

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz<br />

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB<br />

Line-Out Level/ 2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)<br />

Impedance:<br />

Output Impedance: 1 kΩ<br />

Subwoofer-Out 2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)<br />

Level/Impedance:<br />

TUNER SECTION<br />

Frequency Range:<br />

FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz<br />

AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz<br />

FM Tuner<br />

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)<br />

50 dB Quieting 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)<br />

Sensitivity:<br />

Alternate Channel 65 dB<br />

Selectivity (400 kHz):<br />

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz<br />

Stereo Separation: 30 dB<br />

AM Tuner<br />

Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB<br />

CD PLAYER SECTION<br />

Type: Compact disc player<br />

Signal Detection<br />

System:<br />

Non-contact optical pickup<br />

(semiconductor laser)<br />

Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)<br />

Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz<br />

Dynamic Range: 96 dB<br />

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB<br />

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit<br />

MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)<br />

Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps<br />

WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:<br />

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps<br />

GENERAL<br />

Power Requirement:<br />

Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V<br />

(11 V to 16 V allowance)<br />

Grounding System: Negative ground<br />

Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C<br />

Temperature:<br />

Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)<br />

Installation Size: 182 mm × 52 mm × 158 mm<br />

Panel Size: 187 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm<br />

Mass: 1.3 kg (excluding accessories)<br />

Design and specifications are subject to change without<br />

notice.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

17


Having TROUBLE with operation?<br />

Please reset your unit<br />

Refer to page of How to reset your unit<br />

EN, CT<br />

© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited<br />

1006DTSMDTJEIN


CD RECEIVER <strong>KD</strong>-G335<br />

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.<br />

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.<br />

INSTRUCTIONS<br />

<strong>KD</strong>-G335<br />

GET0402-001A<br />

[U/UH]<br />

ENGLISH


ENGLISH<br />

2<br />

Thank you for purchasing a <strong>JVC</strong> product.<br />

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best<br />

possible performance from the unit.<br />

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS<br />

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT<br />

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to<br />

qualified service personnel.<br />

3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical<br />

instruments.<br />

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.<br />

Warning:<br />

[European Union only]<br />

If you need to operate the unit while driving, be<br />

sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved<br />

in a traffic accident.<br />

Caution on volume setting:<br />

Discs produce very little noise compared with other<br />

sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc<br />

to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden<br />

increase of the output level.<br />

How to reset your unit<br />

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.<br />

How to forcibly eject a disc<br />

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.<br />

• If this does not work, reset your unit.


How to use the M MODE button<br />

If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions<br />

mode, then the number buttons and ¢/4<br />

buttons work as different function buttons.<br />

Ex.: When number button 2 works as<br />

MO (monaural) button.<br />

To use these buttons for their original functions<br />

again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds<br />

without pressing any of these buttons until the<br />

functions mode is cleared or press M MODE again.<br />

Detaching the control panel<br />

Attaching the control panel<br />

CONTENTS<br />

Control panel .................................. 4<br />

Remote controller — RM-RK50 ........... 5<br />

Getting started ................................ 6<br />

Basic operations ................................................... 6<br />

Radio operations ............................. 7<br />

Disc operations ................................ 8<br />

Playing a disc in the unit ..................................... 8<br />

Sound adjustments .......................... 10<br />

General settings — PSM .................. 11<br />

Maintenance ................................... 13<br />

More about this unit ........................ 14<br />

Troubleshooting .............................. 16<br />

Specifications .................................. 17<br />

For safety...<br />

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will<br />

block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.<br />

• Stop the car before performing any complicated<br />

operations.<br />

Temperature inside the car...<br />

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold<br />

weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes<br />

normal before operating the unit.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

3


ENGLISH<br />

4<br />

Control panel<br />

Display window<br />

1 0 (eject) button<br />

2 Loading slot<br />

3 (standby/on/attenuator) button<br />

4 Remote sensor<br />

DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light<br />

(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).<br />

5 SOURCE button<br />

6 Display window<br />

7 BAND button<br />

8 EQ (equalizer) button<br />

9 ¢/4 buttons<br />

p Control dial<br />

q SEL (select) button<br />

w DISP (display) button<br />

e MO (monaural) button<br />

r SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button<br />

t Number buttons<br />

y RPT (repeat) button<br />

Parts identification<br />

u RND (random) button<br />

i M MODE button<br />

o (control panel release) button<br />

; Disc information indicators—<br />

TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)<br />

a DISC indicator<br />

s Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),<br />

(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)<br />

d Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),<br />

ST (stereo)<br />

f S.BASS (super bass) indicator<br />

g EQ (equalizer) indicator<br />

h Tr (track) indicator<br />

j Source display / Volume level indicator / Time<br />

countdown indicator<br />

k Main display<br />

l Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)<br />

indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,<br />

USER


Remote controller — RM-RK50<br />

Installing the lithium coin battery<br />

(CR2025)<br />

Aim the remote controller directly at the remote<br />

sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle<br />

in between.<br />

Warning:<br />

• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or<br />

its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.<br />

• Do not leave the remote controller in a place<br />

(such as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight<br />

for a long time; otherwise, it may explode.<br />

• Store the battery in a place where children<br />

cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.<br />

• To prevent the battery from over-heating,<br />

cracking, or starting a fire:<br />

– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the<br />

battery, or dispose of it in a fire.<br />

– Do not leave the battery with other metallic<br />

materials.<br />

– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar<br />

tools.<br />

– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when<br />

throwing away or saving it.<br />

Main elements and features<br />

1 (standby/on/attenuator) button<br />

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or<br />

attenuates the sound when the power is on.<br />

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.<br />

2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons<br />

• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.<br />

• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.<br />

• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.<br />

3 VOL – / VOL + buttons<br />

• Adjusts the volume level.<br />

4 SOUND button<br />

• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent<br />

equalizer).<br />

5 SOURCE button<br />

• Selects the source.<br />

6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons<br />

• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.<br />

• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and<br />

held.<br />

• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

5


ENGLISH<br />

6<br />

Getting started<br />

Basic operations<br />

~ Turn on the power.<br />

Ÿ<br />

* You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if<br />

there is no disc in the unit.<br />

! For FM/AM tuner<br />

⁄ Adjust the volume.<br />

@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See<br />

pages 10 and 11.)<br />

To drop the volume in a<br />

moment (ATT)<br />

To restore the sound, press the<br />

button again.<br />

To turn off the power<br />

Volume level appears.<br />

Basic settings<br />

• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 11 and<br />

12.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

1 Canceling the display demonstrations<br />

Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”<br />

2 Setting the clock<br />

Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.<br />

Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the<br />

minute.<br />

3 Finish the procedure.<br />

To check the current clock time while the<br />

power is turned off<br />

Clock time is shown on the<br />

display for about 5 seconds. See<br />

also page 12.


Radio operations<br />

~<br />

Ÿ<br />

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo<br />

broadcast with sufficient signal strength.<br />

! Start searching for a station.<br />

When a station is received,<br />

searching stops.<br />

To stop searching, press the<br />

same button again.<br />

To tune in to a station manually<br />

In step ! above...<br />

1<br />

2 Select a desired station frequency.<br />

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to<br />

receive<br />

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.<br />

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same<br />

procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator<br />

goes off.<br />

Storing stations in memory<br />

You can preset six stations for each band.<br />

FM station automatic presetting —<br />

SSM (Strong-station Sequential<br />

Memory)<br />

1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to<br />

store into.<br />

2<br />

3<br />

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.<br />

“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic<br />

presetting is over.<br />

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are<br />

searched and stored automatically in the FM band.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

7


ENGLISH<br />

8<br />

Manual presetting<br />

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number<br />

4 of the FM1 band.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

1<br />

Preset number flashes for a while.<br />

Listening to a preset station<br />

2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.<br />

To check the other information while<br />

listening to an FM or AM station<br />

Clock Ô Frequency<br />

Disc operations<br />

Playing a disc in the unit<br />

~ Turn on the power.<br />

Ÿ<br />

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you<br />

change the source or eject the disc.<br />

To stop play and eject the<br />

disc<br />

• Press SOURCE to listen to<br />

another playback source.<br />

To fast-forward or reverse<br />

the track<br />

To go to the next or<br />

previous tracks<br />

To go to the next or previous folders (only<br />

for MP3 or WMA discs)


To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder<br />

(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly<br />

To select a number from 01 – 06:<br />

To select a number from 07 – 12:<br />

• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it<br />

is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit<br />

numbers at the beginning of their folder names—<br />

01, 02, 03, and so on.<br />

To select a particular track in a<br />

folder (for MP3 or WMA disc):<br />

Prohibiting disc ejection<br />

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.<br />

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same<br />

procedure.<br />

Changing the display information<br />

While playing an audio CD or a<br />

CD Text<br />

While playing an MP3 or a WMA disc<br />

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”<br />

(see page 12)<br />

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”<br />

: Clock with the current track number<br />

: Elapsed playing time with the current<br />

track number<br />

: Corresponding indicator lights up on the<br />

display<br />

* 1 If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.<br />

* 2 If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,<br />

folder name and file name appear. In this case, the<br />

TAG indicator will not light up.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

9


ENGLISH<br />

10<br />

Selecting the playback modes<br />

You can use only one of the following playback modes<br />

at a time.<br />

1<br />

2 Select your desired playback mode.<br />

7 Repeat play<br />

Mode Plays repeatedly<br />

TRK RPT : The current track.<br />

FLDR RPT * : All tracks of the current folder.<br />

RPT OFF : Cancels.<br />

7 Random play<br />

Mode Plays at random<br />

FLDR RND * : All tracks of the current folder,<br />

then tracks of the next folder and<br />

so on.<br />

DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc.<br />

RND OFF : Cancels.<br />

* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.<br />

: Corresponding indicator lights up on<br />

the display<br />

Sound adjustments<br />

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the<br />

music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).<br />

BAS*<br />

Indication (For)<br />

1 MID* 2 TRE* 3 S.BS* 4<br />

Preset values<br />

USER<br />

(Flat sound)<br />

00 00 00 OFF<br />

ROCK<br />

(Rock or disco music)<br />

+03 00 +02 ON<br />

CLASSIC<br />

(Classical music)<br />

+01 00 +03 OFF<br />

POPS<br />

(Light music)<br />

+02 +01 +02 OFF<br />

HIP HOP<br />

(Funk or rap music)<br />

+04 –02 +01 ON<br />

JAZZ<br />

(Jazz music)<br />

+03 00 +03 OFF<br />

* 1 : Bass; * 2 : Middle; * 3 : Treble; * 4 : Super bass<br />

Adjusting the sound<br />

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your<br />

preference.<br />

1<br />

2


Indication, [Range]<br />

BAS * 2 (bass), [–06 to +06]<br />

Adjust the bass.<br />

MID * 2 (middle), [–06 to +06]<br />

Adjust the middle frequencies sound level.<br />

TRE * 2 (treble), [–06 to +06]<br />

Adjust the treble.<br />

FAD * 3 (fader), [R06 to F06]<br />

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.<br />

BAL * 4 (balance), [L06 to R06]<br />

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.<br />

S.BS * 2 (super bass), [S.BS ON or S.BS OFF], [01 to 05]* 5<br />

Maintain the richness and fullness of the bass sound<br />

regardless of how low you set the volume.<br />

SUB.W (subwoofer), [00 to 08]<br />

Adjust the subwoofer output level.<br />

VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50 * 6 ]<br />

Adjust the volume.<br />

* 1 Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER”<br />

(see page 12).<br />

* 2 When you adjust the bass, middle, treble, or super<br />

bass, the adjustment you have made is stored for the<br />

currently selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”<br />

* 3 If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader<br />

level to “00.”<br />

* 4 The adjustment cannot affect the subwoofer output.<br />

* 5 Range adjustment for super bass is adjustable only<br />

when it is set to “S.BS ON.”<br />

* 6 Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See<br />

page 12 for details.)<br />

General settings — PSM<br />

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items<br />

listed in the table that follows.<br />

1<br />

2 Select a PSM item.<br />

3 Adjust the PSM item selected.<br />

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM<br />

items if necessary.<br />

5 Finish the procedure.<br />

Continued on the next page<br />

ENGLISH<br />

11


ENGLISH<br />

12<br />

Indications Item<br />

( : Initial)<br />

DEMO<br />

Display demonstration<br />

CLK DISP * 1<br />

Clock display<br />

CLOCK H<br />

Hour adjustment<br />

CLOCK M<br />

Minute adjustment<br />

DIMMER<br />

Dimmer<br />

SCROLL * 2<br />

Scroll<br />

WOOFER * 3<br />

Subwoofer cutoff<br />

frequency<br />

L/O MODE<br />

Line output mode<br />

TAG DISP<br />

Tag display<br />

AMP GAIN<br />

Amplifier gain control<br />

• DEMO ON<br />

• DEMO OFF<br />

• ON<br />

• OFF<br />

Selectable settings, [reference page]<br />

: Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no<br />

operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is<br />

turned off.<br />

: Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about<br />

5 seconds when the power is turned off, [6].<br />

1 – 12 [Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6]<br />

00 – 59 [Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6]<br />

• ON<br />

• OFF<br />

• ONCE<br />

• AUTO<br />

• OFF<br />

• LOW<br />

• MID<br />

• HIGH<br />

• REAR<br />

• WOOFER<br />

• TAG ON<br />

• TAG OFF<br />

• LOW PWR<br />

• HIGH PWR<br />

: Dims the display illumination.<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: Scrolls the disc information once.<br />

: Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).<br />

: Cancels.<br />

• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display<br />

regardless of the setting.<br />

: Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.<br />

: Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.<br />

: Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.<br />

: Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the<br />

speakers (through an external amplifier).<br />

: Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a<br />

subwoofer (through an external amplifier).<br />

: Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [9].<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the<br />

speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from damaging the<br />

speaker.)<br />

: VOL 00 – VOL 50<br />

* 1 If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF” to<br />

save the car’s battery.<br />

* 2 Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.<br />

* 3 Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”


Maintenance<br />

How to clean the connectors<br />

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.<br />

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the<br />

connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with<br />

alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.<br />

Connector<br />

Moisture condensation<br />

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in<br />

the following cases:<br />

• After starting the heater in the car.<br />

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.<br />

Should this occur, the unit malfunction. In this case,<br />

eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few<br />

hours until the moisture evaporates.<br />

How to handle discs<br />

When removing a disc from its Center holder<br />

case, press down the center holder<br />

of the case and lift the disc out,<br />

holding it by the edges.<br />

• Always hold the disc by the edges.<br />

Do not touch its recording surface.<br />

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the<br />

disc around the center holder (with the printed surface<br />

facing up).<br />

• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.<br />

To keep discs clean<br />

A dirty disc may not play correctly.<br />

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with<br />

a soft cloth in a straight line from center<br />

to edge.<br />

• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional<br />

record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean<br />

discs.<br />

To play new discs<br />

New discs may have some rough spots<br />

around the inner and outer edges. If<br />

such a disc is used, this unit may reject<br />

the disc.<br />

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a<br />

pencil or ball-point pen, etc.<br />

Do not use the following discs:<br />

Warped disc<br />

Sticker<br />

Sticker residue<br />

Stick-on label<br />

Unusual shape<br />

Single CD (8 cm disc)<br />

ENGLISH<br />

13


ENGLISH<br />

14<br />

More about this unit<br />

Basic operations<br />

Turning on the power<br />

• By pressing SOURCE on the unit, you can also turn on<br />

the power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.<br />

Turning off the power<br />

• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc<br />

play will start from where playback has been stopped<br />

previously, next time you turn on the power.<br />

Tuner operations<br />

Storing stations in memory<br />

• During SSM search...<br />

– All previously stored stations are erased and<br />

stations are stored newly.<br />

– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest<br />

frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).<br />

– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will<br />

be automatically tuned in.<br />

• When storing a station manually, the previously<br />

preset station is erased when a new station is stored<br />

in the same preset number.<br />

Disc operations<br />

Caution for DualDisc playback<br />

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply<br />

with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.<br />

Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on<br />

this product may not be recommended.<br />

General<br />

• This unit has been designed to reproduce<br />

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs<br />

(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA<br />

formats.<br />

• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are<br />

used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”<br />

• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or<br />

WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.<br />

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW<br />

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.<br />

• This unit can play back only files of the same type<br />

which are first detected if a disc includes both audio<br />

CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.<br />

• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,<br />

unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.<br />

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on<br />

this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for<br />

the following reasons:<br />

– Discs are dirty or scratched.<br />

– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside<br />

the unit.<br />

– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.<br />

– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with<br />

“Packet Write” method.<br />

– There are improper recording conditions (missing<br />

data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,<br />

warped, etc.).<br />

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the<br />

reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular<br />

CDs.<br />

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:<br />

– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck<br />

to the surface.<br />

– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an<br />

ink jet printer.<br />

Using these discs under high temperatures or high<br />

humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the<br />

unit.<br />

Playing an MP3/WMA disc<br />

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the<br />

extension code or (regardless of<br />

the letter case—upper/lower).<br />

• This unit can show the names of albums, artists<br />

(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or<br />

2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.


• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No<br />

other characters can be correctly displayed.<br />

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the<br />

conditions below:<br />

– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps<br />

– Sampling frequency:<br />

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)<br />

24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)<br />

– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,<br />

Joliet, Windows long file name<br />

• The maximum number of characters for file/folder<br />

names vary among the disc format used (includes 4<br />

extension characters— or ).<br />

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters<br />

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters<br />

– Romeo: up to 64 characters<br />

– Joliet: up to 32 characters<br />

– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters<br />

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200<br />

folders, and of 8 hierarchies.<br />

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable<br />

bit rate).<br />

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed<br />

time display, and do not show the actual elapsed<br />

time. Especially, after performing the search function,<br />

this difference becomes noticeable.<br />

• This unit cannot play back the following files:<br />

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.<br />

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.<br />

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.<br />

– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and<br />

voice format.<br />

– WMA files which are not based upon Windows<br />

Media® Audio.<br />

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.<br />

– Files which have the data such as WAVE, ATRAC3,<br />

etc.<br />

• The search function works but search speed is not<br />

constant.<br />

Changing the source<br />

• If you change the source, playback also stops<br />

(without ejecting the disc).<br />

Next time you select “CD” for the playback source,<br />

disc play starts from where it has been stopped<br />

previously.<br />

Ejecting a disc<br />

• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,<br />

the disc is automatically inserted again into the<br />

loading slot to protect it from dust.<br />

• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you<br />

cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another<br />

disc or press SOURCE to select another playback<br />

source.<br />

General settings—PSM<br />

• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from<br />

“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level<br />

is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically<br />

changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”<br />

Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered<br />

trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation<br />

in the United States and/or other countries.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

15


ENGLISH<br />

16<br />

Troubleshooting<br />

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.<br />

General<br />

FM/AM<br />

Disc playback<br />

MP3/WMA playback<br />

Symptoms Remedies/Causes<br />

• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.<br />

• Check the cords and connections.<br />

• The unit does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).<br />

• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.<br />

• Static noise while listening to the radio. Connect the antenna firmly.<br />

• Disc cannot be played back. Insert the disc correctly.<br />

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.<br />

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be<br />

skipped.<br />

• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.<br />

• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you<br />

used for recording.<br />

• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).<br />

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).<br />

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.<br />

• Change the disc.<br />

• Check the cords and connections.<br />

• “NO DISC” appears on the display. Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.<br />

• Disc cannot be played back. • Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the<br />

format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2,<br />

Romeo, or Joliet.<br />

• Add the extension code or to the<br />

file names.<br />

• Noise is generated. Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the<br />

extension code or to non-MP3 or<br />

WMA tracks.)<br />

• A longer readout time is required (“CHECK” Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.<br />

keeps flashing on the display).<br />

• Tracks are not played back in the order you Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.<br />

have intended.<br />

• Elapsed playing time is not correct. This sometimes occurs during play. This is caused by how<br />

the tracks are recorded on the disc.<br />

• “PLEASE EJECT” appears on the display. Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.<br />

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.<br />

album name).<br />

This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),<br />

numbers, and a limited number of symbols.


Specifications<br />

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION<br />

Maximum Power Output:<br />

Front/Rear: 50 W per channel<br />

Continuous Power Output (RMS):<br />

Front/Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω,<br />

40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more<br />

than 0.8% total harmonic<br />

distortion.<br />

Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)<br />

Tone Control Range:<br />

Bass: ±12 dB at 60 Hz<br />

Middle: ±12 dB at 1 kHz<br />

Treble: ±12 dB at 7.5 kHz<br />

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz<br />

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB<br />

Line-Out Level/ 2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)<br />

Impedance:<br />

Output Impedance: 1 kΩ<br />

Subwoofer-Out 2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)<br />

Level/Impedance:<br />

TUNER SECTION<br />

Frequency Range:<br />

FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz<br />

AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz<br />

FM Tuner<br />

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)<br />

50 dB Quieting 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)<br />

Sensitivity:<br />

Alternate Channel 65 dB<br />

Selectivity (400 kHz):<br />

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz<br />

Stereo Separation: 30 dB<br />

AM Tuner<br />

Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB<br />

CD PLAYER SECTION<br />

Type: Compact disc player<br />

Signal Detection<br />

System:<br />

Non-contact optical pickup<br />

(semiconductor laser)<br />

Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)<br />

Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz<br />

Dynamic Range: 96 dB<br />

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB<br />

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit<br />

MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)<br />

Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps<br />

WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:<br />

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps<br />

GENERAL<br />

Power Requirement:<br />

Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V<br />

(11 V to 16 V allowance)<br />

Grounding System: Negative ground<br />

Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C<br />

Temperature:<br />

Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)<br />

Installation Size: 182 mm × 52 mm × 158 mm<br />

Panel Size: 187 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm<br />

Mass: 1.3 kg (excluding accessories)<br />

Design and specifications are subject to change without<br />

notice.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

17


Having TROUBLE with operation?<br />

Please reset your unit<br />

Refer to page of How to reset your unit<br />

EN, TH<br />

© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited<br />

1006DTSMDTJEIN


GET0402-006A<br />

[U/UH]<br />

ENGLISH<br />

<strong>KD</strong>-G335<br />

Installation/Connection Manual<br />

°“√µ‘¥µ— Èß/§ŸË¡◊Õ°“√µ‘¥µ—<br />

Èß<br />

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does<br />

not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at <strong>JVC</strong> car audio dealers.<br />

WARNINGS<br />

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all<br />

electrical connections before installing the unit.<br />

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.<br />

Notes:<br />

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your <strong>JVC</strong> car audio<br />

dealer.<br />

• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at<br />

the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than<br />

50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 12 of the<br />

INSTRUCTIONS).<br />

• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.<br />

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.<br />

Parts list for installation and connection<br />

The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your <strong>JVC</strong> car audio dealer<br />

immediately.<br />

A / B<br />

Hard case/Control panel<br />

≈—ß∫√√®ÿ/ÀπÈ“ª—¥<br />

E<br />

Power cord<br />

“¬‡§‡∫‘≈°”≈—ß<br />

I<br />

Rubber cushion<br />

¬“ß°—π°√–·∑°<br />

Heat sink<br />

·ºËπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√ÈÕπ<br />

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:<br />

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit<br />

will be seriously damaged.<br />

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in<br />

your car.<br />

F<br />

Washer (ø5)<br />

ª√–‡°Áπ«ß·À«π (ø5)<br />

J<br />

Handles<br />

§—π∫—ߧ—∫<br />

C<br />

Sleeve<br />

ª≈Õ°ÀÿÈ¡<br />

1<br />

‰∑¬<br />

G<br />

Lock nut (M5)<br />

πÕµ≈ÁÕ§ (M5)<br />

K<br />

Remote controller<br />

√’‚¡µ§Õπ‚∑√≈<br />

1006DTSMDTJEIN<br />

EN, TH<br />

© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited<br />

ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’ ȉ¥È√—∫°“√ÕÕ°·∫∫¡“‡æ◊ËÕ„Èß“π°—∫√–∫∫<br />

°√–· ‰øøÈ“ “¬¥‘π¢— È«≈∫°√–· µ√ß 12 ‚«≈∑Ï À“°√∂¬πµÏ¢Õߧÿ≥‰¡Ë‰<br />

¥È„È√–∫∫π’ È µÈÕ߄ȇ§√◊ËÕß·ª≈ß°√–·<br />

‰øË«¬ ´÷ Ëß “¡“√∂À“´◊ÈÕ‰¥È®“°√È“π¢“¬‡§√◊ËÕ߇<br />

’¬ß√∂¬πµÏ <strong>JVC</strong><br />

§”‡µ◊Õπ<br />

‡æ◊ËÕªÈÕß°—π°“√‡°‘¥‰øøÈ“≈—¥«ß®√<br />

¢Õ·π–π”„ÀȪ≈¥¢— È«·∫µ‡µÕ√’ Ë≈∫ÕÕ° ·≈È«®÷ßµËÕ “¬‰ø°ËÕ𵑥µ— È߇§√◊ËÕß<br />

• µ√«® Õ∫„ÀÈ·πË„®«Ë“‰¥È‡¥‘𠓬¥‘πµËÕ√–À«Ë“߇§√◊ËÕß°—∫µ—«∂—ß<br />

√∂¬πµÏ„À¡Ë·≈È«À≈—ß®“°µ‘¥µ— Èß<br />

À¡“¬‡Àµÿ:<br />

• „Èæ‘°—¥®”‡æ“–·∑πø‘« À“°ø‘« Ï¢“¥∫ËÕ¬ „ÀȪ√÷°…“√È“ π¢“¬‡§√◊ËÕ߇<br />

’¬ß√∂¬πµÏ <strong>JVC</strong><br />

• ¢Õ·π–π”„ÀȵËÕ≈”‚æß ∑’ Ë¡’°”≈—ߢ—∫ ß ÿ¥‡°‘π°«Ë“ 50 W (∑— ÈߥȓπÀπÈ“·≈–¥È“πÀ≈—ß ¡’§Ë“§«“¡µÈ“π∑“π 4 Ω ∂÷ß 8 Ω)<br />

∂È“°”≈—ߢ—∫µË”°«Ë“ 50 W „Àȇª≈’ ˬπ§Ë“ “AMP GAIN” ‡æ◊ËÕªÈÕß°—π‰¡Ë„ÀÈ≈”‚æß”√ÿ¥<br />

(¥ŸÀπÈ“ 12 §”·π–π”)<br />

• °“√ªÈÕß°—π°“√≈—¥«ß®√ ®–µÈÕßæ—π¢— È« “¬µ–°— Ë« ∑’ ˉ¡Ë„È·≈È«¥È«¬‡∑ ªæ—𠓬‰ø<br />

• ·ºËπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√ÈÕπ®–√ÈÕπ¡“°À≈—ß®“°„È √–¡—¥√–«—ßլ˓‰ª —¡º— ‡¡◊ËÕ∂Õ¥ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’<br />

È<br />

¢ÈÕ§«√√–«—ß ”À√—∫°“√µËÕ·À≈Ë߮˓¬°”≈—ß·≈–≈”‚æß:<br />

• լ˓µËÕ “¬µ–°— Ë«‡§‡∫‘≈°”≈—ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢È“°—∫·∫µ‡µÕ√’ Ë√∂¬πµÏ ¡‘©–π— Èπ ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫®–‰¥È√—∫§«“¡‡ ’¬À“¬¡“°<br />

• °ËÕπ∑’ Ë®–µËÕ “¬µ–°— Ë«‡§‡∫‘≈°”≈—ߢÕß≈”‚æ߇¢È“°—∫≈”‚æß „Àȵ√«® Õ∫°“√‡¥‘𠓬‰ø≈”‚æß„π√∂¢Õߧÿ≥„Àȇ√’¬∫√ÈÕ¬‡ ’¬°ËÕπ<br />

√“¬°“√ Ë«πª√–°Õ∫ ”À√—∫µ‘¥µ— Èß·≈–‡◊ËÕ¡µËÕ°—π<br />

Ë«πª√–°Õ∫µËÕ‰ªπ’ È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’ È À“°¡’ ‘ Ëß„¥‰¡Ë§√∫ °√ÿ≥“ª√÷°…“µ—«·∑π®”ÀπË“¬‡§√◊ËÕ߇<br />

’¬ßµ‘¥√∂¬πµÏ‚¥¬∑—π∑’<br />

D<br />

Trim plate<br />

·ºËπ‚≈À–¢Õ∫·µËß<br />

H<br />

Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)<br />

≈—°µ‘¥ (M5 × 20 ¡¡.)<br />

L<br />

Battery<br />

·∫µ‡µÕ√


INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)<br />

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information<br />

regarding installation kits, consult your <strong>JVC</strong> car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.<br />

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.<br />

Removing the unit<br />

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.<br />

When using the optional stay / ‡¡◊ËՄȵ—«¬÷¥·∫∫‡≈◊Õ°‰¥È<br />

Dashboard<br />

·ºßÀπÈ“ª—∑¡á<br />

Fire wall<br />

ºπ—ß°—π‰ø<br />

Stay (option)<br />

µ—«¬÷¥ (‡≈◊Õ°‰¥È)<br />

Screw (option)<br />

°√Ÿ (‡≈◊Õ°‰¥È)<br />

Install the unit at an angle of less<br />

than 30˚.<br />

µ‘¥µ— Èßÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫∑’ Ë¡ÿ¡µË”°«Ë“ 30˚ Õß»“<br />

* 1 When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.<br />

* 2 Not supplied for this unit.<br />

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / ‡¡◊ËÕµ‘¥µ—<br />

Èßÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫‚¥¬‰¡Ë„Ȫ≈Õ°ÀÿÈ¡<br />

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.<br />

µ—«Õ¬Ë“߇Ëπ „π√∂¬πµÏ‚µ‚¬µÈ“ „ÀÈ∂Õ¥«‘∑¬ÿµ‘¥√∂¬πµÏÕÕ°°ËÕπ ·≈ô«®÷ßµ‘¥µíô߇§√◊ËÕßπ’<br />

ô‡¢ô“·∑π∑’ Ë<br />

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)* 2<br />

°√ŸÀ—«‡√’¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡.)* 2<br />

Pocket<br />

°–‡ª“–<br />

2<br />

°“√µ‘¥µ— Èß (°“√ª√–°Õ∫·ºßÀπÈ“ª—∑¡Ï‡¢È“)<br />

¿“æµ—«Õ¬Ë“ßµËÕ‰ªπ’ È· ¥ß∂÷ß°“√µ‘¥µ— Èß·∫∫∑— Ë«‰ª À“°§ÿ≥¡’ª—≠À“À√◊ÕµÈÕß°“√¢ÈÕ¡Ÿ≈‡°’ ˬ«°—∫ÿ¥µ‘¥µ— Èß °√ÿ≥“ª√÷°…“°—∫ºŸÈ¢“¬‡§√◊ËÕ߇<br />

’<br />

¬ß√∂¬πµÏ <strong>JVC</strong> ¢Õß∑Ë“πÀ√◊Õ∫√‘…—<br />

• ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ ∂È“§ÿ≥‰¡Ë·πË„®«Ë“µ‘¥µ— Èßÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’ È∂Ÿ°µÈÕßÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë „ÀÈÀ“˓ߺŸÈ‡’<br />

ˬ«“≠‡ªÁπºŸÈµ‘¥µ—<br />

Èß<br />

Do the required electrical connections.<br />

µËÕ “¬‰øµ“¡∑’ Ë°”À𥉫È∑— ÈßÀ¡¥<br />

°“√∂Õ¥ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫<br />

°ËÕπ®–∂Õ¥ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ „ÀȪ≈¥ÀπÈ“µ—¥ Ë«π∑È“¬°ËÕπ<br />

Insert the two handles, then pull them as<br />

illustrated so that the unit can be removed.<br />

„ ˧—π∫—ߧ—∫ 2 Õ—π≈ß„π√ËÕß ”À√—∫„Èæ—π≈«¥ ¥—ß¿“æ ®“°π— Èπ<br />

„Àȇ≈◊ËÕπÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ÕÕ°<br />

„π¢≥–∑’ ˧ËÕ¬ Ê ¥÷ߧ—π∫—ߧ—∫∑— Èß Õß<br />

Õ—πÕÕ°®“°°—π<br />

Bracket* 2<br />

·∑Ëπ√Õß√—∫* 2<br />

Bracket* 2<br />

·∑Ëπ√Õß√—∫* 2<br />

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the<br />

sleeve firmly in place.<br />

ßÕ·ºËπ‡æ◊ËÕ¬÷¥ª≈Õ°„ÀȵËÕ°—π‡¢È“∑’<br />

Ë<br />

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)* 2<br />

°√ŸÀ—«‡√’¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡.)* 2<br />

Note : When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are<br />

used, they could damage the unit.<br />

À¡“¬‡Àµ : ‡¡◊ËÕµ‘¥µ—<br />

Èßÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫≈ß„π·∑Ëπ√Õß√—∫‰«È „ÀÈ„È °√Ÿ¬“«¢π“¥ 8 ¡¡. ∂È“„È °√Ÿ¬“«°«Ë“π’ ÈÕ“®∑”„ÀÈÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫‡ ’¬À“¬‰¥ô<br />

* 1 ‡¡◊ËÕ§ÿ≥µ—<br />

Èßÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫¢÷<br />

* 2 ‰¡Ë‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’ È<br />

Èπ √–«—ßլ˓∑”„ÀÈø‘« Ï∫√‘‡«≥ Ë«π∑È“¬‡ ’¬À“¬


ENGLISH<br />

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS<br />

A<br />

Typical connections / °“√‡◊ËÕ¡µËÕ·∫∫ª°µ<br />

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious<br />

damage to this unit.<br />

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.<br />

1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.<br />

2 Connect the antenna cord.<br />

3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.<br />

Rear ground terminal<br />

®ÿ¥‡◊ËÕ¡µËÕ<br />

“¬¥‘π¥È“πÀ≈—ß<br />

White with black stripe<br />

’¢“«·∂∫¥”<br />

Antenna terminal<br />

¢— È« “¬Õ“°“»<br />

Line out (see diagram )<br />

“¬ÕÕ° (¥Ÿ·ºπ¿Ÿ¡ )<br />

White<br />

’¢“«<br />

Left speaker (front)<br />

≈”‚æß´È“¬ (ÀπÈ“)<br />

Gray with black stripe<br />

’‡∑“·∂∫¥”<br />

15 A fuse<br />

ø‘« Ï¢π“¥ 15 A<br />

Gray<br />

’‡∑“<br />

Right speaker (front)<br />

≈”‚æߢ«“ (ÀπÈ“)<br />

* 1 Not supplied for this unit.<br />

* 2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power<br />

cannot be turned on.<br />

Black<br />

’¥”<br />

Yellow * 2<br />

’‡À≈◊Õß * 2<br />

Red<br />

’·¥ß<br />

Blue<br />

»’øÈ“<br />

Blue with white stripe<br />

’πÈ”‡ß‘π≈“¬¢“«<br />

To metallic body or chassis of the car<br />

µËÕ°—∫‚§√ß‚≈À–À√◊Õ‡ ´‘ ¢Õß√∂¬πµá<br />

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery<br />

(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)<br />

µËÕ°—∫¢— È«∑’ Ë¡’°√–· ‰øøÈ“„π·ºßø‘« Ï ´÷ ËßµËÕ°—∫·∫µ‡µÕ√’ Ë√∂¬πµ<br />

(‚¥¬‰¡ËµÈÕß„È «‘∑Ï®ÿ¥√–‡∫‘¥) (12 ‚«≈∑ϧß∑’ Ë)<br />

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block<br />

µËÕ°—∫¢— È« Ë«πª√–°Õ∫„π·ºßø‘«<br />

Green with black stripe<br />

’‡¢’¬«·∂∫¥”<br />

3<br />

‰∑¬<br />

°“√‡◊ËÕ¡‚¥¬„È<br />

‰øøÈ“<br />

°ËÕ•∑”°“•‡•ËÕ¡µËÕ: µ•«®†Õ•°“•‡¥‘•†“¬‰ø„•••¬•µÏլ˓ߕ–¡—¥•–«—լ˓„ÀȺ‘¥æ•“¥„•°“•‡•ËÕ¡µËÕÿ¥ª•–°Õ•ÿ¥•’<br />

°“•‡•ËÕ¡µËÕº‘¥æ•“¥Õ“®∑”„Àȇ°‘¥§«“¡‡†’¬À“¬•È“¬·•ß°—•ÿ¥ª•–<br />

°Õ••’ ȉ¥È“•µ–°— Ë«¢Õ߆“¬‰ø ·•–¢ÕßÕÿª°••ÏµËÕ‡•ËÕ¡®“°µ—«• ß••Õ“®¡’ ’ ∑’ ˉ¡Ë‡À¡•Õ•°—<br />

1 µËÕ “¬‰ø ’µ“¡≈”¥—∫∑’ Ë√–∫ÿ„π√Ÿª¥È“π≈Ë“ß<br />

2 ‡◊ËÕ¡µËÕ°—∫“¬Õ“°“»<br />

3 ÿ¥∑È“¬ µËÕ Ë«π§«∫§ÿ¡°“√‡¥‘𠓬‰ø‡¢È“°—∫ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ÿ¥π’ È<br />

To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)<br />

‡ “Õ“°“»‰øøÈ“Õ—µ‚π¡—µ‘ À“°¡’ (¢π“¥ Ÿß ¸¥ 250 mA)<br />

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)<br />

µËÕ‡¢È“°—∫Õª°√≥ÏÕË◊π<br />

(¢π“¥ Ÿß ¸¥ 200 mA)<br />

Green<br />

’‡¢’¬«<br />

Left speaker (rear)<br />

≈”‚æß´È“¬ (À≈—ß)<br />

Purple with black stripe<br />

’¡Ë«ß·∂∫¥”<br />

* 1 ‰¡Ë‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’ È<br />

* 2 °ËÕπ°“√µ√«® Õ∫°“√∑”ß“π¢Õßÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’ È°ËÕπ∑’ Ë®–µ‘¥µ— Èß µÈÕßµËÕ “¬µ–°— Ë«π’ È°ËÕπ<br />

¡‘©–π— Èπ®–‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª‘¥‡§√◊ËÕ߉¥<br />

Ignition switch<br />

«‘∑Ï®ÿ¥√–‡∫‘¥<br />

Fuse block<br />

·ºßø‘«<br />

Purple<br />

’¡Ë«ß<br />

Right speaker (rear)<br />

≈”‚æߢ«“ (À≈—ß)


B<br />

Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer / µËÕ·Õ¡ª≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√ÏÀ√◊Õ´—∫«Ÿø‡øÕ√ϥȓππÕ<br />

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.<br />

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it<br />

can be controlled through this unit.<br />

• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker<br />

leads of this unit unused.<br />

Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 12 of the<br />

INSTRUCTIONS.)<br />

µ— Èߧ˓ “L/O MODE” ‡ªìπ “REAR” (¥ŸÀπÈ“ 12 §”·π–π”)<br />

You can connect a power amplifier for rear speakers.<br />

∑Ë“π “¡“√∂µËÕ‡§√◊ËÕߢ¬“¬‡<br />

’¬ß‡ª Áπ≈”‚æßÀ≈—߉¥È Rear speakers<br />

≈”‚æßÀ≈—ß<br />

Subwoofer<br />

´—∫«Ÿø‡øÕ√Ï<br />

<strong>JVC</strong> Amplifier<br />

‡§√◊ËÕߢ¬“¬‡<br />

’¬ß <strong>JVC</strong><br />

Set “L/O MODE” to “WOOFER” (See page 12 of the<br />

INSTRUCTIONS.)<br />

µ— Èߧ˓ “L/O MODE” ‡ªìπ “WOOFER” (¥ŸÀπÈ“ 12 §”·π–π”)<br />

You can also connect a subwoofer to the REAR LINE OUT<br />

terminals.<br />

∑Ë“π¬—ß “¡“√∂µËÕ´—∫«Ÿø‡øÕ√χ¢È“°—∫ËÕßµËÕ —≠≠“≥ REAR LINE OUT ‰¥È<br />

* 3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with<br />

paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage<br />

to the unit.<br />

* 4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)<br />

TROUBLESHOOTING<br />

• The fuse blows.<br />

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?<br />

• Power cannot be turned on.<br />

* Is the yellow lead connected?<br />

• No sound from the speakers.<br />

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?<br />

• Sound is distorted.<br />

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?<br />

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?<br />

• Noise interfere with sounds.<br />

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?<br />

• This unit becomes hot.<br />

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?<br />

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?<br />

• This unit does not work at all.<br />

* Have you reset your unit?<br />

<strong>JVC</strong> Amplifier<br />

‡§√◊ËÕߢ¬“¬‡<br />

’¬ß <strong>JVC</strong><br />

or<br />

À√◊Õ<br />

4<br />

§ÿ≥ “¡“√∂µËÕ°—∫·Õ¡æ≈‘ø“¬‡ÕÕ√Ï ‡æ◊ËÕ‡æ‘<br />

Ë¡§ÿ≥ ¿“æ‡ ’¬ß„ÀÈ°—∫√–∫∫ ‡µÕ√‘‚Õ¢Õß√∂¬πµÏ<br />

• µËÕ “¬µ–°— Ë«√–¬–‰°≈ ( ’πÈ”‡ß‘π≈“¬¢“«) ‡¢È“°—∫ “¬µ–°— Ë«√–¬–‰°≈¢ÕßÕÿª°√≥ÏÕ◊Ëπ<br />

Ê ‡æ◊ËÕ®–<br />

“¡“√∂§«∫§ÿ¡‚¥¬ÿ¥ª√–<br />

°Õ∫π’ ȉ¥È<br />

• ∂Õ¥≈”‚æßÕÕ°®“°ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’ È ·≈È«µËÕ‡¢È“°—∫‡§√◊ËÕߢ¬“¬<br />

∑‘ Èß “¬µ–°— Ë«≈”‚æߢÕßÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’ ȉ«È<br />

Remote lead<br />

“¬µ–°— Ë«•–¬–‰°•<br />

Remote lead (blue with white stripe)<br />

“¬µ–°— Ë«•–¬–‰°• ( ’πÈ”‡ß‘π≈“¬¢“«)<br />

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)<br />

¢ÈÕµËÕ√Ÿªµ—« Y (‰¡Ë‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’ È)<br />

To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any<br />

µËÕ “¬°—∫Õÿª°√≥ÏÕ◊ËπÀ√◊Õ‡<br />

“Õ“°“»Õ—µ‚π¡—µ‘∂È“¡’<br />

Front speakers<br />

≈”‚æßÀπÈ“<br />

* 3 µËÕ≈«¥ “¬¥‘π„ÀÈ·πËπ‡¢È“°—∫µ—«∂—߇À≈Á° À√◊Õµ—«∂—ß√∂—µ√ß Ë«π ∑’ ˉ¡Ë¡’ ’‡§≈◊Õ∫ (À“°¡’ ’‡§≈◊Õ∫Õ¬ŸË<br />

„ÀÈ¢Ÿ¥ ’ÕÕ°°ËÕπ<br />

°ËÕπµËÕ≈«¥ “¬¥‘π) À“°‰¡ËªØ‘∫—µ‘µ“¡§”·π–π”π’ È ‡§√◊ËÕßÕ“®”√ÿ¥À√◊Õ‡<br />

’¬À“¬‰¥<br />

* 4 “¬‡§‡∫‘≈ —≠≠“≥ (‰¡Ë‰¥È„ÀÈ¡“°—∫ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π’ È)<br />

°“√µ√«® Õ∫ª—≠À“¢—¥¢ÈÕß<br />

• ø‘« Ï¢“¥<br />

* ¡’°“√‡◊ËÕ¡<br />

“¬µ–°— Ë« ’¥”·≈– ’·¥ßլ˓ß∂Ÿ°µÈÕßÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë<br />

• ‰¡Ë “¡“√∂‡ª‘¥‡§√◊ËÕ߉¥È<br />

* ¡’°“√‡◊ËÕ¡<br />

“¬µ–°— Ë« ’‡À≈◊ÕßÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë<br />

• ‰¡Ë¡’‡ ’¬ßÕÕ°®“°≈”‚æß<br />

* “¬µ–°— Ë« Ë«π∑’ ËÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æ߇°‘¥‰øøÈ“≈—¥«ß®√À√◊Õ‰¡Ë<br />

• ‡ ’¬ß‡æ’ Ȭπ<br />

* “¬µ–°— Ë« Ë«π∑’ ËÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµËÕ≈ߥ‘πÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë<br />

* “¬¢— È«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æߥȓπ´È“¬·≈–¢«“µËÕ≈ߥ‘πµ“¡ª°µ‘À√◊Õ‰¡Ë<br />

• ‡ ’¬ß√∫°«π<br />

* ¡’°“√„È “¬ — ÈπÊ À√◊ÕÀπ“Ê µËÕ®“°‡§√◊ËÕß<br />

«π∑’ ˵‘¥µ— Èß ‰«È∫πæ◊Èπ¥È“πÀ≈—ß°—∫µ—«∂—ß√∂¬πµÏÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë<br />

• ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫√ÈÕπ¢÷ Èπ<br />

* “¬µ–°— Ë« Ë«π∑’ ËÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµËÕ≈ߥ‘πÀ√◊Õ‰¡Ë<br />

* “¬¢— È«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æߥȓπ´È“¬·≈–¢«“µËÕ≈ߥ‘πµ“¡ª°µ‘À√◊Õ‰¡Ë<br />

• ‡§√◊ËÕß√—∫π’<br />

È∑”ß“π‰¡<br />

* ∑Ë“π‰¥Èµ— È߇§√◊ËÕß„À¡Ë·≈È«À√◊Õ¬—ß


CD RECEIVER <strong>KD</strong>-G334<br />

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.<br />

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.<br />

INSTRUCTIONS<br />

GET0404-001A<br />

[UI]


CD RECEIVER <strong>KD</strong>-G334<br />

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.<br />

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.<br />

INSTRUCTIONS<br />

GET0404-001A<br />

[UI]


2<br />

Thank you for purchasing a <strong>JVC</strong> product.<br />

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best<br />

possible performance from the unit.<br />

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS<br />

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT<br />

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to<br />

qualified service personnel.<br />

3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical<br />

instruments.<br />

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.<br />

Warning:<br />

[European Union only]<br />

If you need to operate the unit while driving, be<br />

sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved<br />

in a traffic accident.<br />

Caution on volume setting:<br />

Discs produce very little noise compared with other<br />

sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc<br />

to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden<br />

increase of the output level.<br />

How to reset your unit<br />

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.<br />

How to forcibly eject a disc<br />

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.<br />

• If this does not work, reset your unit.


How to use the M MODE button<br />

If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions<br />

mode, then the number buttons and ¢/4<br />

buttons work as different function buttons.<br />

Ex.: When number button 2 works as<br />

MO (monaural) button.<br />

To use these buttons for their original functions<br />

again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds<br />

without pressing any of these buttons until the<br />

functions mode is cleared or press M MODE again.<br />

Detaching the control panel<br />

Attaching the control panel<br />

CONTENTS<br />

Control panel .................................. 4<br />

Remote controller — RM-RK50 ........... 5<br />

Getting started ................................ 6<br />

Basic operations ................................................... 6<br />

Radio operations ............................. 7<br />

Disc operations ................................ 8<br />

Playing a disc in the unit ..................................... 8<br />

Sound adjustments .......................... 10<br />

General settings — PSM .................. 11<br />

Maintenance ................................... 13<br />

More about this unit ........................ 14<br />

Troubleshooting .............................. 16<br />

Specifications .................................. 17<br />

For safety...<br />

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will<br />

block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.<br />

• Stop the car before performing any complicated<br />

operations.<br />

Temperature inside the car...<br />

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold<br />

weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes<br />

normal before operating the unit.<br />

3


4<br />

Control panel<br />

Display window<br />

1 0 (eject) button<br />

2 Loading slot<br />

3 (standby/on/attenuator) button<br />

4 Remote sensor<br />

DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light<br />

(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).<br />

5 SOURCE button<br />

6 Display window<br />

7 BAND button<br />

8 EQ (equalizer) button<br />

9 ¢/4 buttons<br />

p Control dial<br />

q SEL (select) button<br />

w DISP (display) button<br />

e MO (monaural) button<br />

r SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button<br />

t Number buttons<br />

y RPT (repeat) button<br />

Parts identification<br />

u RND (random) button<br />

i M MODE button<br />

o (control panel release) button<br />

; Disc information indicators—<br />

TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)<br />

a DISC indicator<br />

s Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),<br />

(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)<br />

d Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),<br />

ST (stereo)<br />

f S.BASS (super bass) indicator<br />

g EQ (equalizer) indicator<br />

h Tr (track) indicator<br />

j Source display / Volume level indicator / Time<br />

countdown indicator<br />

k Main display<br />

l Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)<br />

indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,<br />

USER


Remote controller — RM-RK50<br />

Installing the lithium coin battery<br />

(CR2025)<br />

Aim the remote controller directly at the remote<br />

sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle<br />

in between.<br />

Warning:<br />

• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or<br />

its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.<br />

• Do not leave the remote controller in a place<br />

(such as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight<br />

for a long time; otherwise, it may explode.<br />

• Store the battery in a place where children<br />

cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.<br />

• To prevent the battery from over-heating,<br />

cracking, or starting a fire:<br />

– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the<br />

battery, or dispose of it in a fire.<br />

– Do not leave the battery with other metallic<br />

materials.<br />

– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar<br />

tools.<br />

– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when<br />

throwing away or saving it.<br />

Main elements and features<br />

1 (standby/on/attenuator) button<br />

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or<br />

attenuates the sound when the power is on.<br />

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.<br />

2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons<br />

• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.<br />

• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.<br />

• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.<br />

3 VOL – / VOL + buttons<br />

• Adjusts the volume level.<br />

4 SOUND button<br />

• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent<br />

equalizer).<br />

5 SOURCE button<br />

• Selects the source.<br />

6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons<br />

• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.<br />

• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and<br />

held.<br />

• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.<br />

5


6<br />

Getting started<br />

Basic operations<br />

~ Turn on the power.<br />

Ÿ<br />

* You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if<br />

there is no disc in the unit.<br />

! For FM/AM tuner<br />

⁄ Adjust the volume.<br />

@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See<br />

pages 10 and 11.)<br />

To drop the volume in a<br />

moment (ATT)<br />

To restore the sound, press the<br />

button again.<br />

To turn off the power<br />

Volume level appears.<br />

Basic settings<br />

• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 11 and<br />

12.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

1 Canceling the display demonstrations<br />

Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”<br />

2 Setting the clock<br />

Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.<br />

Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the<br />

minute.<br />

3 Finish the procedure.<br />

To check the current clock time while the<br />

power is turned off<br />

Clock time is shown on the<br />

display for about 5 seconds. See<br />

also page 12.


Radio operations<br />

~<br />

Ÿ<br />

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo<br />

broadcast with sufficient signal strength.<br />

! Start searching for a station.<br />

When a station is received,<br />

searching stops.<br />

To stop searching, press the<br />

same button again.<br />

To tune in to a station manually<br />

In step ! above...<br />

1<br />

2 Select a desired station frequency.<br />

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to<br />

receive<br />

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.<br />

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same<br />

procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator<br />

goes off.<br />

Storing stations in memory<br />

You can preset six stations for each band.<br />

FM station automatic presetting —<br />

SSM (Strong-station Sequential<br />

Memory)<br />

1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to<br />

store into.<br />

2<br />

3<br />

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.<br />

“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic<br />

presetting is over.<br />

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are<br />

searched and stored automatically in the FM band.<br />

7


8<br />

Manual presetting<br />

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number<br />

4 of the FM1 band.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

1<br />

Preset number flashes for a while.<br />

Listening to a preset station<br />

2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.<br />

To check the other information while<br />

listening to an FM or AM station<br />

Clock Ô Frequency<br />

Disc operations<br />

Playing a disc in the unit<br />

~ Turn on the power.<br />

Ÿ<br />

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you<br />

change the source or eject the disc.<br />

To stop play and eject the<br />

disc<br />

• Press SOURCE to listen to<br />

another playback source.<br />

To fast-forward or reverse<br />

the track<br />

To go to the next or<br />

previous tracks<br />

To go to the next or previous folders (only<br />

for MP3 or WMA discs)


To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder<br />

(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly<br />

To select a number from 01 – 06:<br />

To select a number from 07 – 12:<br />

• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it<br />

is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit<br />

numbers at the beginning of their folder names—<br />

01, 02, 03, and so on.<br />

To select a particular track in a<br />

folder (for MP3 or WMA disc):<br />

Prohibiting disc ejection<br />

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.<br />

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same<br />

procedure.<br />

Changing the display information<br />

While playing an audio CD or a<br />

CD Text<br />

While playing an MP3 or a WMA disc<br />

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”<br />

(see page 12)<br />

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”<br />

: Clock with the current track number<br />

: Elapsed playing time with the current<br />

track number<br />

: Corresponding indicator lights up on the<br />

display<br />

* 1 If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.<br />

* 2 If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,<br />

folder name and file name appear. In this case, the<br />

TAG indicator will not light up.<br />

9


10<br />

Selecting the playback modes<br />

You can use only one of the following playback modes<br />

at a time.<br />

1<br />

2 Select your desired playback mode.<br />

7 Repeat play<br />

Mode Plays repeatedly<br />

TRK RPT : The current track.<br />

FLDR RPT * : All tracks of the current folder.<br />

RPT OFF : Cancels.<br />

7 Random play<br />

Mode Plays at random<br />

FLDR RND * : All tracks of the current folder,<br />

then tracks of the next folder and<br />

so on.<br />

DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc.<br />

RND OFF : Cancels.<br />

* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.<br />

: Corresponding indicator lights up on<br />

the display<br />

Sound adjustments<br />

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the<br />

music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).<br />

BAS*<br />

Indication (For)<br />

1 MID* 2 TRE* 3 S.BS* 4<br />

Preset values<br />

USER<br />

(Flat sound)<br />

00 00 00 OFF<br />

ROCK<br />

(Rock or disco music)<br />

+03 00 +02 ON<br />

CLASSIC<br />

(Classical music)<br />

+01 00 +03 OFF<br />

POPS<br />

(Light music)<br />

+02 +01 +02 OFF<br />

HIP HOP<br />

(Funk or rap music)<br />

+04 –02 +01 ON<br />

JAZZ<br />

(Jazz music)<br />

+03 00 +03 OFF<br />

* 1 : Bass; * 2 : Mid-range; * 3 : Treble; * 4 : Super bass<br />

Adjusting the sound<br />

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your<br />

preference.<br />

1<br />

2


Indication, [Range]<br />

BAS * 2 (bass), [–06 to +06]<br />

Adjust the bass.<br />

MID * 2 (mid-range), [–06 to +06]<br />

Adjust the mid-range frequencies sound level.<br />

TRE * 2 (treble), [–06 to +06]<br />

Adjust the treble.<br />

FAD * 3 (fader), [R06 to F06]<br />

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.<br />

BAL * 4 (balance), [L06 to R06]<br />

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.<br />

S.BS * 2 (super bass), [S.BS ON or S.BS OFF], [01 to 05]* 5<br />

Maintain the richness and fullness of the bass sound<br />

regardless of how low you set the volume.<br />

SUB.W (subwoofer), [00 to 08]<br />

Adjust the subwoofer output level.<br />

VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50 * 6 ]<br />

Adjust the volume.<br />

* 1 Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER”<br />

(see page 12).<br />

* 2 When you adjust the bass, mid-range, treble, or super<br />

bass, the adjustment you have made is stored for the<br />

currently selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”<br />

* 3 If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader<br />

level to “00.”<br />

* 4 The adjustment cannot affect the subwoofer output.<br />

* 5 Range adjustment for super bass is adjustable only<br />

when it is set to “S.BS ON.”<br />

* 6 Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See<br />

page 12 for details.)<br />

General settings — PSM<br />

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items<br />

listed in the table that follows.<br />

1<br />

2 Select a PSM item.<br />

3 Adjust the PSM item selected.<br />

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM<br />

items if necessary.<br />

5 Finish the procedure.<br />

Continued on the next page<br />

11


12<br />

Indications Item<br />

( : Initial)<br />

DEMO<br />

Display demonstration<br />

CLK DISP * 1<br />

Clock display<br />

CLOCK H<br />

Hour adjustment<br />

CLOCK M<br />

Minute adjustment<br />

DIMMER<br />

Dimmer<br />

SCROLL * 2<br />

Scroll<br />

WOOFER * 3<br />

Subwoofer cutoff<br />

frequency<br />

L/O MODE<br />

Line output mode<br />

TAG DISP<br />

Tag display<br />

AMP GAIN<br />

Amplifier gain control<br />

• DEMO ON<br />

• DEMO OFF<br />

• ON<br />

• OFF<br />

Selectable settings, [reference page]<br />

: Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no<br />

operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is<br />

turned off.<br />

: Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about<br />

5 seconds when the power is turned off, [6].<br />

1 – 12 [Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6]<br />

00 – 59 [Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6]<br />

• ON<br />

• OFF<br />

• ONCE<br />

• AUTO<br />

• OFF<br />

• LOW<br />

• MID<br />

• HIGH<br />

• REAR<br />

• WOOFER<br />

• TAG ON<br />

• TAG OFF<br />

• LOW PWR<br />

• HIGH PWR<br />

: Dims the display illumination.<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: Scrolls the disc information once.<br />

: Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).<br />

: Cancels.<br />

• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display<br />

regardless of the setting.<br />

: Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.<br />

: Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.<br />

: Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.<br />

: Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the<br />

speakers (through an external amplifier).<br />

: Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a<br />

subwoofer (through an external amplifier).<br />

: Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [9].<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the<br />

speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from damaging the<br />

speaker.)<br />

: VOL 00 – VOL 50<br />

* 1 If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF” to<br />

save the car’s battery.<br />

* 2 Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.<br />

* 3 Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”


Maintenance<br />

How to clean the connectors<br />

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.<br />

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the<br />

connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with<br />

alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.<br />

Connector<br />

Moisture condensation<br />

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in<br />

the following cases:<br />

• After starting the heater in the car.<br />

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.<br />

Should this occur, the unit may malfunction. In this<br />

case, eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a<br />

few hours until the moisture evaporates.<br />

How to handle discs<br />

When removing a disc from its Center holder<br />

case, press down the center holder<br />

of the case and lift the disc out,<br />

holding it by the edges.<br />

• Always hold the disc by the edges.<br />

Do not touch its recording surface.<br />

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the<br />

disc around the center holder (with the printed surface<br />

facing up).<br />

• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.<br />

To keep discs clean<br />

A dirty disc may not play correctly.<br />

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with<br />

a soft cloth in a straight line from center<br />

to edge.<br />

• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional<br />

record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean<br />

discs.<br />

To play new discs<br />

New discs may have some rough spots<br />

around the inner and outer edges. If<br />

such a disc is used, this unit may reject<br />

the disc.<br />

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a<br />

pencil or ball-point pen, etc.<br />

Do not use the following discs:<br />

Warped disc<br />

Sticker<br />

Sticker residue<br />

Stick-on label<br />

Unusual shape<br />

Single CD (8 cm disc)<br />

13


14<br />

More about this unit<br />

Basic operations<br />

Turning on the power<br />

• By pressing SOURCE on the unit, you can also turn on<br />

the power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.<br />

Turning off the power<br />

• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc<br />

play will start from where playback has been stopped<br />

previously, next time you turn on the power.<br />

Tuner operations<br />

Storing stations in memory<br />

• During SSM search...<br />

– All previously stored stations are erased and<br />

stations are stored newly.<br />

– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest<br />

frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).<br />

– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will<br />

be automatically tuned in.<br />

• When storing a station manually, the previously<br />

preset station is erased when a new station is stored<br />

in the same preset number.<br />

Disc operations<br />

Caution for DualDisc playback<br />

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply<br />

with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.<br />

Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on<br />

this product may not be recommended.<br />

General<br />

• This unit has been designed to reproduce<br />

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs<br />

(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA<br />

formats.<br />

• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are<br />

used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”<br />

• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or<br />

WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.<br />

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW<br />

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.<br />

• This unit can play back only files of the same type<br />

which are first detected if a disc includes both audio<br />

CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.<br />

• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,<br />

unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.<br />

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on<br />

this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for<br />

the following reasons:<br />

– Discs are dirty or scratched.<br />

– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside<br />

the unit.<br />

– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.<br />

– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with<br />

“Packet Write” method.<br />

– There are improper recording conditions (missing<br />

data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,<br />

warped, etc.).<br />

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the<br />

reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular<br />

CDs.<br />

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:<br />

– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck<br />

to the surface.<br />

– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an<br />

ink jet printer.<br />

Using these discs under high temperatures or high<br />

humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the<br />

unit.<br />

Playing an MP3/WMA disc<br />

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the<br />

extension code or (regardless of<br />

the letter case—upper/lower).<br />

• This unit can show the names of albums, artists<br />

(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or<br />

2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.


• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No<br />

other characters can be correctly displayed.<br />

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the<br />

conditions below:<br />

– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps<br />

– Sampling frequency:<br />

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)<br />

24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)<br />

– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,<br />

Joliet, Windows long file name<br />

• The maximum number of characters for file/folder<br />

names vary among the disc format used (includes 4<br />

extension characters— or ).<br />

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters<br />

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters<br />

– Romeo: up to 64 characters<br />

– Joliet: up to 32 characters<br />

– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters<br />

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200<br />

folders, and of 8 hierarchies.<br />

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable<br />

bit rate).<br />

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed<br />

time display, and do not show the actual elapsed<br />

time. Especially, after performing the search function,<br />

this difference becomes noticeable.<br />

• This unit cannot play back the following files:<br />

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.<br />

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.<br />

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.<br />

– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and<br />

voice format.<br />

– WMA files which are not based upon Windows<br />

Media® Audio.<br />

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.<br />

– Files which have the data such as WAVE, ATRAC3,<br />

etc.<br />

• The search function works but search speed is not<br />

constant.<br />

Changing the source<br />

• If you change the source, playback also stops<br />

(without ejecting the disc).<br />

Next time you select “CD” for the playback source,<br />

disc play starts from where it has been stopped<br />

previously.<br />

Ejecting a disc<br />

• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,<br />

the disc is automatically inserted again into the<br />

loading slot to protect it from dust.<br />

• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you<br />

cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another<br />

disc or press SOURCE to select another playback<br />

source.<br />

General settings—PSM<br />

• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from<br />

“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level<br />

is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically<br />

changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”<br />

Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered<br />

trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation<br />

in the United States and/or other countries.<br />

15


16<br />

Troubleshooting<br />

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.<br />

General<br />

FM/AM<br />

Disc playback<br />

MP3/WMA playback<br />

Symptoms Remedies/Causes<br />

• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.<br />

• Check the cords and connections.<br />

• The unit does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).<br />

• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.<br />

• Static noise while listening to the radio. Connect the antenna firmly.<br />

• Disc cannot be played back. Insert the disc correctly.<br />

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.<br />

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be<br />

skipped.<br />

• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.<br />

• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you<br />

used for recording.<br />

• Disc can neither be played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).<br />

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).<br />

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.<br />

• Change the disc.<br />

• Check the cords and connections.<br />

• “NO DISC” appears on the display. Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.<br />

• Disc cannot be played back. • Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the<br />

format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2,<br />

Romeo, or Joliet.<br />

• Add the extension code or to the<br />

file names.<br />

• Noise is generated. Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the<br />

extension code or to non-MP3 or<br />

WMA tracks.)<br />

• A longer readout time is required (“CHECK” Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.<br />

keeps flashing on the display).<br />

• Tracks are not played back in the order you Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.<br />

have intended.<br />

• Elapsed playing time is not correct. This sometimes occurs during play. This is caused by how<br />

the tracks are recorded on the disc.<br />

• “PLEASE” and ”EJECT” appear alternately on Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.<br />

the display.<br />

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.<br />

album name).<br />

This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),<br />

numbers, and a limited number of symbols.


Specifications<br />

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION<br />

Maximum Power Output:<br />

Front/Rear: 50 W per channel<br />

Continuous Power Output (RMS):<br />

Front/Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω,<br />

40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more<br />

than 0.8% total harmonic<br />

distortion.<br />

Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)<br />

Tone Control Range:<br />

Bass: ±12 dB at 60 Hz<br />

Mid-range: ±12 dB at 1 kHz<br />

Treble: ±12 dB at 7.5 kHz<br />

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz<br />

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB<br />

Line-Out Level/ 2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)<br />

Impedance:<br />

Output Impedance: 1 kΩ<br />

Subwoofer-Out 2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)<br />

Level/Impedance:<br />

TUNER SECTION<br />

Frequency Range:<br />

FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz<br />

AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz<br />

FM Tuner<br />

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)<br />

50 dB Quieting 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)<br />

Sensitivity:<br />

Alternate Channel 65 dB<br />

Selectivity (400 kHz):<br />

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz<br />

Stereo Separation: 30 dB<br />

AM Tuner<br />

Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB<br />

CD PLAYER SECTION<br />

Type: Compact disc player<br />

Signal Detection<br />

System:<br />

Non-contact optical pickup<br />

(semiconductor laser)<br />

Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)<br />

Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz<br />

Dynamic Range: 96 dB<br />

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB<br />

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit<br />

MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)<br />

Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps<br />

WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:<br />

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps<br />

GENERAL<br />

Power Requirement:<br />

Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V<br />

(11 V to 16 V allowance)<br />

Grounding System: Negative ground<br />

Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C<br />

Temperature:<br />

Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)<br />

Installation Size: 182 mm × 52 mm × 158 mm<br />

Panel Size: 187 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm<br />

Mass: 1.3 kg (excluding accessories)<br />

Design and specifications are subject to change without<br />

notice.<br />

17


Having TROUBLE with operation?<br />

Please reset your unit<br />

Refer to page of How to reset your unit<br />

EN<br />

© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited<br />

1006DTSMDTJEIN


GET0404-002A<br />

[UI]<br />

<strong>KD</strong>-G334<br />

Installation/Connection Manual<br />

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does<br />

not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at <strong>JVC</strong> car audio dealers.<br />

WARNINGS<br />

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all<br />

electrical connections before installing the unit.<br />

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.<br />

Notes:<br />

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your <strong>JVC</strong> car audio<br />

dealer.<br />

• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at<br />

the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than<br />

50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 12 of the<br />

INSTRUCTIONS).<br />

• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads<br />

with insulating tape.<br />

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it<br />

when removing this unit.<br />

Heat sink<br />

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:<br />

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit<br />

will be seriously damaged.<br />

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in<br />

your car.<br />

Parts list for installation and connection<br />

The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your <strong>JVC</strong> car audio dealer<br />

immediately.<br />

A / B<br />

Hard case/Control panel<br />

E<br />

Power cord<br />

I<br />

Rubber cushion<br />

J<br />

Handles<br />

TROUBLESHOOTING<br />

C<br />

Sleeve<br />

F<br />

Washer (ø5)<br />

G<br />

Lock nut (M5)<br />

K<br />

Remote controller<br />

D<br />

Trim plate<br />

H<br />

Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)<br />

L<br />

Battery<br />

• The fuse blows.<br />

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?<br />

• Power cannot be turned on.<br />

* Is the yellow lead connected?<br />

• No sound from the speakers.<br />

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?<br />

• Sound is distorted.<br />

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?<br />

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?<br />

• Noise interfere with sounds.<br />

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?<br />

• This unit becomes hot.<br />

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?<br />

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?<br />

• This unit does not work at all.<br />

* Have you reset your unit?<br />

1<br />

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)<br />

1006DTSMDTJEIN<br />

EN<br />

© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited<br />

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information<br />

regarding installation kits, consult your <strong>JVC</strong> car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.<br />

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.<br />

Do the required electrical<br />

connections.<br />

Removing the unit<br />

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.<br />

Insert the two handles, then pull them as<br />

illustrated so that the unit can be removed.<br />

When using the optional stay<br />

Dashboard<br />

Fire wall<br />

Screw<br />

(option)<br />

Install the unit at an<br />

angle of less than 30˚.<br />

Stay<br />

(option)<br />

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold<br />

the sleeve firmly in place.<br />

When installing the unit<br />

without using the sleeve<br />

In a Toyota car for example, first remove<br />

the car radio and install the unit in its<br />

place.<br />

Bracket* 2<br />

* 1 When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.<br />

* 2 Not supplied for this unit.<br />

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)* 2<br />

Flat type screws<br />

(M5 × 8 mm)*<br />

Note:<br />

When installing the unit on the mounting<br />

bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long<br />

screws. If longer screws are used, they<br />

could damage the unit.<br />

2<br />

Pocket<br />

Bracket* 2


ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS<br />

A<br />

Typical connections<br />

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.<br />

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.<br />

1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.<br />

2 Connect the antenna cord.<br />

3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.<br />

B<br />

Rear ground terminal<br />

White with black stripe<br />

Antenna terminal<br />

Line out (see diagram )<br />

White<br />

Left speaker (front)<br />

Gray with black stripe<br />

Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer<br />

15 A fuse<br />

Black<br />

Yellow * 2<br />

Blue with white stripe<br />

Gray<br />

Right speaker (front)<br />

To metallic body or chassis of the car<br />

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery<br />

(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)<br />

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block<br />

Green with black stripe<br />

* 1 Not supplied for this unit.<br />

* 2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.<br />

* 3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.<br />

* 4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit).<br />

2<br />

To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)<br />

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.<br />

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through this unit.<br />

• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.<br />

Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 12 of the<br />

INSTRUCTIONS.)<br />

You can connect a power amplifier for rear speakers.<br />

Rear speakers<br />

Subwoofer<br />

<strong>JVC</strong> Amplifier<br />

Set “L/O MODE” to “WOOFER” (See page 12 of the<br />

INSTRUCTIONS.)<br />

You can also connect a subwoofer to the REAR LINE OUT<br />

terminals.<br />

<strong>JVC</strong> Amplifier<br />

or<br />

Red<br />

Blue<br />

Remote lead<br />

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)<br />

Green<br />

Left speaker (rear)<br />

Remote lead (blue with white stripe)<br />

Purple with black stripe<br />

Ignition switch<br />

Fuse block<br />

Purple<br />

Right speaker (rear)<br />

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)<br />

To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any<br />

Front speakers


CD RECEIVER <strong>KD</strong>-G335<br />

ALAT PENERIMA CD <strong>KD</strong>-G335<br />

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.<br />

Untuk membatalkan tampilan demonstrasi, lihat halaman 6.<br />

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.<br />

Untuk instalasi dan penyambungan, lihat buku pedoman terpisah.<br />

INSTRUCTIONS<br />

BUKU PETUNJUK<br />

GET0402-004A<br />

[UN]<br />

ENGLISH<br />

INDONESIA


ENGLISH<br />

2<br />

Thank you for purchasing a <strong>JVC</strong> product.<br />

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best<br />

possible performance from the unit.<br />

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS<br />

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT<br />

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to<br />

qualified service personnel.<br />

3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical<br />

instruments.<br />

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.<br />

Warning:<br />

[European Union only]<br />

If you need to operate the unit while driving, be<br />

sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved<br />

in a traffic accident.<br />

Caution on volume setting:<br />

Discs produce very little noise compared with other<br />

sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc<br />

to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden<br />

increase of the output level.<br />

How to reset your unit<br />

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.<br />

How to forcibly eject a disc<br />

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.<br />

• If this does not work, reset your unit.


How to use the M MODE button<br />

If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions<br />

mode, then the number buttons and ¢/4<br />

buttons work as different function buttons.<br />

Ex.: When number button 2 works as<br />

MO (monaural) button.<br />

To use these buttons for their original functions<br />

again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds<br />

without pressing any of these buttons until the<br />

functions mode is cleared or press M MODE again.<br />

Detaching the control panel<br />

Attaching the control panel<br />

CONTENTS<br />

Control panel .................................. 4<br />

Remote controller — RM-RK50 ........... 5<br />

Getting started ................................ 6<br />

Basic operations ................................................... 6<br />

Radio operations ............................. 7<br />

Disc operations ................................ 8<br />

Playing a disc in the unit ..................................... 8<br />

Sound adjustments .......................... 10<br />

General settings — PSM .................. 11<br />

Maintenance ................................... 13<br />

More about this unit ........................ 14<br />

Troubleshooting .............................. 16<br />

Specifications .................................. 17<br />

For safety...<br />

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will<br />

block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.<br />

• Stop the car before performing any complicated<br />

operations.<br />

Temperature inside the car...<br />

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold<br />

weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes<br />

normal before operating the unit.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

3


ENGLISH<br />

4<br />

Control panel<br />

Display window<br />

1 0 (eject) button<br />

2 Loading slot<br />

3 (standby/on/attenuator) button<br />

4 Remote sensor<br />

DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light<br />

(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).<br />

5 SOURCE button<br />

6 Display window<br />

7 BAND button<br />

8 EQ (equalizer) button<br />

9 ¢/4 buttons<br />

p Control dial<br />

q SEL (select) button<br />

w DISP (display) button<br />

e MO (monaural) button<br />

r SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button<br />

t Number buttons<br />

y RPT (repeat) button<br />

Parts identification<br />

u RND (random) button<br />

i M MODE button<br />

o (control panel release) button<br />

; Disc information indicators—<br />

TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)<br />

a DISC indicator<br />

s Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),<br />

(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)<br />

d Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),<br />

ST (stereo)<br />

f S.BASS (super bass) indicator<br />

g EQ (equalizer) indicator<br />

h Tr (track) indicator<br />

j Source display / Volume level indicator / Time<br />

countdown indicator<br />

k Main display<br />

l Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)<br />

indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,<br />

USER


Remote controller — RM-RK50<br />

Installing the lithium coin battery<br />

(CR2025)<br />

Aim the remote controller directly at the remote<br />

sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle<br />

in between.<br />

Warning:<br />

• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or<br />

its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.<br />

• Do not leave the remote controller in a place<br />

(such as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight<br />

for a long time; otherwise, it may explode.<br />

• Store the battery in a place where children<br />

cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.<br />

• To prevent the battery from over-heating,<br />

cracking, or starting a fire:<br />

– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the<br />

battery, or dispose of it in a fire.<br />

– Do not leave the battery with other metallic<br />

materials.<br />

– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar<br />

tools.<br />

– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when<br />

throwing away or saving it.<br />

Main elements and features<br />

1 (standby/on/attenuator) button<br />

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or<br />

attenuates the sound when the power is on.<br />

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.<br />

2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons<br />

• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.<br />

• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.<br />

• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.<br />

3 VOL – / VOL + buttons<br />

• Adjusts the volume level.<br />

4 SOUND button<br />

• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent<br />

equalizer).<br />

5 SOURCE button<br />

• Selects the source.<br />

6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons<br />

• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.<br />

• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and<br />

held.<br />

• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

5


ENGLISH<br />

6<br />

Getting started<br />

Basic operations<br />

~ Turn on the power.<br />

Ÿ<br />

* You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if<br />

there is no disc in the unit.<br />

! For FM/AM tuner<br />

⁄ Adjust the volume.<br />

@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See<br />

pages 10 and 11.)<br />

To drop the volume in a<br />

moment (ATT)<br />

To restore the sound, press the<br />

button again.<br />

To turn off the power<br />

Volume level appears.<br />

Basic settings<br />

• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 11 and<br />

12.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

1 Canceling the display demonstrations<br />

Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”<br />

2 Setting the clock<br />

Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.<br />

Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the<br />

minute.<br />

3 Finish the procedure.<br />

To check the current clock time while the<br />

power is turned off<br />

Clock time is shown on the<br />

display for about 5 seconds. See<br />

also page 12.


Radio operations<br />

~<br />

Ÿ<br />

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo<br />

broadcast with sufficient signal strength.<br />

! Start searching for a station.<br />

When a station is received,<br />

searching stops.<br />

To stop searching, press the<br />

same button again.<br />

To tune in to a station manually<br />

In step ! above...<br />

1<br />

2 Select a desired station frequency.<br />

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to<br />

receive<br />

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.<br />

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same<br />

procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator<br />

goes off.<br />

Storing stations in memory<br />

You can preset six stations for each band.<br />

FM station automatic presetting —<br />

SSM (Strong-station Sequential<br />

Memory)<br />

1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to<br />

store into.<br />

2<br />

3<br />

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.<br />

“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic<br />

presetting is over.<br />

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are<br />

searched and stored automatically in the FM band.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

7


ENGLISH<br />

8<br />

Manual presetting<br />

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number<br />

4 of the FM1 band.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

1<br />

Preset number flashes for a while.<br />

Listening to a preset station<br />

2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.<br />

To check the other information while<br />

listening to an FM or AM station<br />

Clock Ô Frequency<br />

Disc operations<br />

Playing a disc in the unit<br />

~ Turn on the power.<br />

Ÿ<br />

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you<br />

change the source or eject the disc.<br />

To stop play and eject the<br />

disc<br />

• Press SOURCE to listen to<br />

another playback source.<br />

To fast-forward or reverse<br />

the track<br />

To go to the next or<br />

previous tracks<br />

To go to the next or previous folders (only<br />

for MP3 or WMA discs)


To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder<br />

(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly<br />

To select a number from 01 – 06:<br />

To select a number from 07 – 12:<br />

• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it<br />

is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit<br />

numbers at the beginning of their folder names—<br />

01, 02, 03, and so on.<br />

To select a particular track in a<br />

folder (for MP3 or WMA disc):<br />

Prohibiting disc ejection<br />

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.<br />

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same<br />

procedure.<br />

Changing the display information<br />

While playing an audio CD or a<br />

CD Text<br />

While playing an MP3 or a WMA disc<br />

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”<br />

(see page 12)<br />

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”<br />

: Clock with the current track number<br />

: Elapsed playing time with the current<br />

track number<br />

: Corresponding indicator lights up on the<br />

display<br />

* 1 If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.<br />

* 2 If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,<br />

folder name and file name appear. In this case, the<br />

TAG indicator will not light up.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

9


ENGLISH<br />

10<br />

Selecting the playback modes<br />

You can use only one of the following playback modes<br />

at a time.<br />

1<br />

2 Select your desired playback mode.<br />

7 Repeat play<br />

Mode Plays repeatedly<br />

TRK RPT : The current track.<br />

FLDR RPT * : All tracks of the current folder.<br />

RPT OFF : Cancels.<br />

7 Random play<br />

Mode Plays at random<br />

FLDR RND * : All tracks of the current folder,<br />

then tracks of the next folder and<br />

so on.<br />

DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc.<br />

RND OFF : Cancels.<br />

* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.<br />

: Corresponding indicator lights up on<br />

the display<br />

Sound adjustments<br />

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the<br />

music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).<br />

BAS*<br />

Indication (For)<br />

1 MID* 2 TRE* 3 S.BS* 4<br />

Preset values<br />

USER<br />

(Flat sound)<br />

00 00 00 OFF<br />

ROCK<br />

(Rock or disco music)<br />

+03 00 +02 ON<br />

CLASSIC<br />

(Classical music)<br />

+01 00 +03 OFF<br />

POPS<br />

(Light music)<br />

+02 +01 +02 OFF<br />

HIP HOP<br />

(Funk or rap music)<br />

+04 –02 +01 ON<br />

JAZZ<br />

(Jazz music)<br />

+03 00 +03 OFF<br />

* 1 : Bass; * 2 : Middle; * 3 : Treble; * 4 : Super bass<br />

Adjusting the sound<br />

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your<br />

preference.<br />

1<br />

2


Indication, [Range]<br />

BAS * 2 (bass), [–06 to +06]<br />

Adjust the bass.<br />

MID * 2 (middle), [–06 to +06]<br />

Adjust the middle frequencies sound level.<br />

TRE * 2 (treble), [–06 to +06]<br />

Adjust the treble.<br />

FAD * 3 (fader), [R06 to F06]<br />

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.<br />

BAL * 4 (balance), [L06 to R06]<br />

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.<br />

S.BS * 2 (super bass), [S.BS ON or S.BS OFF], [01 to 05]* 5<br />

Maintain the richness and fullness of the bass sound<br />

regardless of how low you set the volume.<br />

SUB.W (subwoofer), [00 to 08]<br />

Adjust the subwoofer output level.<br />

VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50 * 6 ]<br />

Adjust the volume.<br />

* 1 Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER”<br />

(see page 12).<br />

* 2 When you adjust the bass, middle, treble, or super<br />

bass, the adjustment you have made is stored for the<br />

currently selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”<br />

* 3 If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader<br />

level to “00.”<br />

* 4 The adjustment cannot affect the subwoofer output.<br />

* 5 Range adjustment for super bass is adjustable only<br />

when it is set to “S.BS ON.”<br />

* 6 Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See<br />

page 12 for details.)<br />

General settings — PSM<br />

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items<br />

listed in the table that follows.<br />

1<br />

2 Select a PSM item.<br />

3 Adjust the PSM item selected.<br />

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM<br />

items if necessary.<br />

5 Finish the procedure.<br />

Continued on the next page<br />

ENGLISH<br />

11


ENGLISH<br />

12<br />

Indications Item<br />

( : Initial)<br />

DEMO<br />

Display demonstration<br />

CLK DISP * 1<br />

Clock display<br />

CLOCK H<br />

Hour adjustment<br />

CLOCK M<br />

Minute adjustment<br />

DIMMER<br />

Dimmer<br />

SCROLL * 2<br />

Scroll<br />

WOOFER * 3<br />

Subwoofer cutoff<br />

frequency<br />

L/O MODE<br />

Line output mode<br />

TAG DISP<br />

Tag display<br />

AMP GAIN<br />

Amplifier gain control<br />

• DEMO ON<br />

• DEMO OFF<br />

• ON<br />

• OFF<br />

Selectable settings, [reference page]<br />

: Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no<br />

operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is<br />

turned off.<br />

: Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about<br />

5 seconds when the power is turned off, [6].<br />

1 – 12 [Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6]<br />

00 – 59 [Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6]<br />

• ON<br />

• OFF<br />

• ONCE<br />

• AUTO<br />

• OFF<br />

• LOW<br />

• MID<br />

• HIGH<br />

• REAR<br />

• WOOFER<br />

• TAG ON<br />

• TAG OFF<br />

• LOW PWR<br />

• HIGH PWR<br />

: Dims the display illumination.<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: Scrolls the disc information once.<br />

: Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).<br />

: Cancels.<br />

• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display<br />

regardless of the setting.<br />

: Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.<br />

: Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.<br />

: Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.<br />

: Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the<br />

speakers (through an external amplifier).<br />

: Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a<br />

subwoofer (through an external amplifier).<br />

: Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [9].<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the<br />

speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from damaging the<br />

speaker.)<br />

: VOL 00 – VOL 50<br />

* 1 If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF” to<br />

save the car’s battery.<br />

* 2 Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.<br />

* 3 Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”


Maintenance<br />

How to clean the connectors<br />

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.<br />

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the<br />

connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with<br />

alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.<br />

Connector<br />

Moisture condensation<br />

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in<br />

the following cases:<br />

• After starting the heater in the car.<br />

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.<br />

Should this occur, the unit malfunction. In this case,<br />

eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few<br />

hours until the moisture evaporates.<br />

How to handle discs<br />

When removing a disc from its Center holder<br />

case, press down the center holder<br />

of the case and lift the disc out,<br />

holding it by the edges.<br />

• Always hold the disc by the edges.<br />

Do not touch its recording surface.<br />

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the<br />

disc around the center holder (with the printed surface<br />

facing up).<br />

• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.<br />

To keep discs clean<br />

A dirty disc may not play correctly.<br />

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with<br />

a soft cloth in a straight line from center<br />

to edge.<br />

• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional<br />

record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean<br />

discs.<br />

To play new discs<br />

New discs may have some rough spots<br />

around the inner and outer edges. If<br />

such a disc is used, this unit may reject<br />

the disc.<br />

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a<br />

pencil or ball-point pen, etc.<br />

Do not use the following discs:<br />

Warped disc<br />

Sticker<br />

Sticker residue<br />

Stick-on label<br />

Unusual shape<br />

Single CD (8 cm disc)<br />

ENGLISH<br />

13


ENGLISH<br />

14<br />

More about this unit<br />

Basic operations<br />

Turning on the power<br />

• By pressing SOURCE on the unit, you can also turn on<br />

the power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.<br />

Turning off the power<br />

• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc<br />

play will start from where playback has been stopped<br />

previously, next time you turn on the power.<br />

Tuner operations<br />

Storing stations in memory<br />

• During SSM search...<br />

– All previously stored stations are erased and<br />

stations are stored newly.<br />

– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest<br />

frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).<br />

– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will<br />

be automatically tuned in.<br />

• When storing a station manually, the previously<br />

preset station is erased when a new station is stored<br />

in the same preset number.<br />

Disc operations<br />

Caution for DualDisc playback<br />

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply<br />

with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.<br />

Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on<br />

this product may not be recommended.<br />

General<br />

• This unit has been designed to reproduce<br />

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs<br />

(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA<br />

formats.<br />

• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are<br />

used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”<br />

• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or<br />

WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.<br />

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW<br />

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.<br />

• This unit can play back only files of the same type<br />

which are first detected if a disc includes both audio<br />

CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.<br />

• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,<br />

unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.<br />

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on<br />

this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for<br />

the following reasons:<br />

– Discs are dirty or scratched.<br />

– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside<br />

the unit.<br />

– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.<br />

– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with<br />

“Packet Write” method.<br />

– There are improper recording conditions (missing<br />

data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,<br />

warped, etc.).<br />

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the<br />

reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular<br />

CDs.<br />

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:<br />

– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck<br />

to the surface.<br />

– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an<br />

ink jet printer.<br />

Using these discs under high temperatures or high<br />

humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the<br />

unit.<br />

Playing an MP3/WMA disc<br />

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the<br />

extension code or (regardless of<br />

the letter case—upper/lower).<br />

• This unit can show the names of albums, artists<br />

(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or<br />

2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.


• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No<br />

other characters can be correctly displayed.<br />

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the<br />

conditions below:<br />

– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps<br />

– Sampling frequency:<br />

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)<br />

24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)<br />

– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,<br />

Joliet, Windows long file name<br />

• The maximum number of characters for file/folder<br />

names vary among the disc format used (includes 4<br />

extension characters— or ).<br />

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters<br />

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters<br />

– Romeo: up to 64 characters<br />

– Joliet: up to 32 characters<br />

– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters<br />

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200<br />

folders, and of 8 hierarchies.<br />

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable<br />

bit rate).<br />

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed<br />

time display, and do not show the actual elapsed<br />

time. Especially, after performing the search function,<br />

this difference becomes noticeable.<br />

• This unit cannot play back the following files:<br />

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.<br />

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.<br />

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.<br />

– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and<br />

voice format.<br />

– WMA files which are not based upon Windows<br />

Media® Audio.<br />

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.<br />

– Files which have the data such as WAVE, ATRAC3,<br />

etc.<br />

• The search function works but search speed is not<br />

constant.<br />

Changing the source<br />

• If you change the source, playback also stops<br />

(without ejecting the disc).<br />

Next time you select “CD” for the playback source,<br />

disc play starts from where it has been stopped<br />

previously.<br />

Ejecting a disc<br />

• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,<br />

the disc is automatically inserted again into the<br />

loading slot to protect it from dust.<br />

• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you<br />

cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another<br />

disc or press SOURCE to select another playback<br />

source.<br />

General settings—PSM<br />

• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from<br />

“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level<br />

is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically<br />

changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”<br />

Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered<br />

trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation<br />

in the United States and/or other countries.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

15


ENGLISH<br />

16<br />

Troubleshooting<br />

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.<br />

General<br />

FM/AM<br />

Disc playback<br />

MP3/WMA playback<br />

Symptoms Remedies/Causes<br />

• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.<br />

• Check the cords and connections.<br />

• The unit does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).<br />

• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.<br />

• Static noise while listening to the radio. Connect the antenna firmly.<br />

• Disc cannot be played back. Insert the disc correctly.<br />

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.<br />

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be<br />

skipped.<br />

• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.<br />

• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you<br />

used for recording.<br />

• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).<br />

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).<br />

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.<br />

• Change the disc.<br />

• Check the cords and connections.<br />

• “NO DISC” appears on the display. Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.<br />

• Disc cannot be played back. • Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the<br />

format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2,<br />

Romeo, or Joliet.<br />

• Add the extension code or to the<br />

file names.<br />

• Noise is generated. Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the<br />

extension code or to non-MP3 or<br />

WMA tracks.)<br />

• A longer readout time is required (“CHECK” Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.<br />

keeps flashing on the display).<br />

• Tracks are not played back in the order you Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.<br />

have intended.<br />

• Elapsed playing time is not correct. This sometimes occurs during play. This is caused by how<br />

the tracks are recorded on the disc.<br />

• “PLEASE EJECT” appears on the display. Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.<br />

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.<br />

album name).<br />

This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),<br />

numbers, and a limited number of symbols.


Specifications<br />

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION<br />

Maximum Power Output:<br />

Front/Rear: 50 W per channel<br />

Continuous Power Output (RMS):<br />

Front/Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω,<br />

40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more<br />

than 0.8% total harmonic<br />

distortion.<br />

Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)<br />

Tone Control Range:<br />

Bass: ±12 dB at 60 Hz<br />

Middle: ±12 dB at 1 kHz<br />

Treble: ±12 dB at 7.5 kHz<br />

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz<br />

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB<br />

Line-Out Level/ 2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)<br />

Impedance:<br />

Output Impedance: 1 kΩ<br />

Subwoofer-Out 2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)<br />

Level/Impedance:<br />

TUNER SECTION<br />

Frequency Range:<br />

FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz<br />

AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz<br />

FM Tuner<br />

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)<br />

50 dB Quieting 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)<br />

Sensitivity:<br />

Alternate Channel 65 dB<br />

Selectivity (400 kHz):<br />

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz<br />

Stereo Separation: 30 dB<br />

AM Tuner<br />

Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB<br />

CD PLAYER SECTION<br />

Type: Compact disc player<br />

Signal Detection<br />

System:<br />

Non-contact optical pickup<br />

(semiconductor laser)<br />

Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)<br />

Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz<br />

Dynamic Range: 96 dB<br />

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB<br />

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit<br />

MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)<br />

Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps<br />

WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:<br />

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps<br />

GENERAL<br />

Power Requirement:<br />

Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V<br />

(11 V to 16 V allowance)<br />

Grounding System: Negative ground<br />

Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C<br />

Temperature:<br />

Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)<br />

Installation Size: 182 mm × 52 mm × 158 mm<br />

Panel Size: 187 mm × 58 mm × 13 mm<br />

Mass: 1.3 kg (excluding accessories)<br />

Design and specifications are subject to change without<br />

notice.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

17


Having TROUBLE with operation?<br />

Please reset your unit<br />

Refer to page of How to reset your unit<br />

Ada MASALAH dengan cara<br />

pengoperasian?<br />

Setel kembali unit Anda<br />

Lihat halaman mengenai Bagaimana mereset unit anda<br />

EN, IN<br />

© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited<br />

1006DTSMDTJEIN


GET0402-009A<br />

[UN]<br />

ENGLISH<br />

<strong>KD</strong>-G335<br />

Installation/Connection Manual<br />

Manual Pemasangan/Penyambungan<br />

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does<br />

not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at <strong>JVC</strong> car audio dealers.<br />

WARNINGS<br />

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all<br />

electrical connections before installing the unit.<br />

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.<br />

Notes:<br />

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your <strong>JVC</strong> car audio<br />

dealer.<br />

• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at<br />

the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than<br />

50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 12 of the<br />

INSTRUCTIONS).<br />

• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.<br />

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.<br />

A / B<br />

Hard case/Control panel<br />

Kotak keras/Panel kontrol<br />

E<br />

Power cord<br />

Kabel power<br />

I<br />

Rubber cushion<br />

Bantalan karet<br />

Heat sink<br />

Pendingin<br />

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:<br />

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit<br />

will be seriously damaged.<br />

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in<br />

your car.<br />

Parts list for installation and connection<br />

The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your <strong>JVC</strong> car audio dealer<br />

immediately.<br />

F<br />

Washer (ø5)<br />

Perapat sambungan (ø5)<br />

J<br />

Handles<br />

Pegangan-pegangan<br />

C<br />

Sleeve<br />

Selongsong<br />

1<br />

INDONESIA<br />

1006DTSMDTJEIN<br />

EN, IN<br />

© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited<br />

Alat penerima ini didisain untuk beroperasi hanya pada 12 V DC, sistem listrik tanah NEGATIVE. Jika<br />

kendaraan anda tidak memiliki sistem ini, sebuah pembalik tegangan diperlukan, yang mana dapat dibeli<br />

di penyalur-penyalur audio mobil <strong>JVC</strong>.<br />

PERINGATAN<br />

Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, kami menyarankan anda memutuskan sambungan terminal negatif<br />

baterai dan membuat semua sambungan-sambungan listrik sebelum memasang alat penerima.<br />

• Pastikan untuk mentanahkan alat penerima ini ke casis mobil kembali setelah pemasangan.<br />

Catatan:<br />

• Ganti sekring dengan voltase yang sudah ditetapkan. Jika sekring sering meledak, konsultasikan pada<br />

penyalur audio mobil <strong>JVC</strong> anda.<br />

• Disarankan untuk menghubungkan speaker-speaker dengan maksimum power lebih dari 50 W (keduanya<br />

di belakang dan di depan, dengan sebuah impedansi 4 Ω sampai 8 Ω). Jika maksimum power kurang<br />

dari 50 W, ganti pengaturan “AMP GAIN” (“PENAMBAH PENGUAT”) untuk mencegah speaker-speaker<br />

dari kerusakan (lihat halaman 12 dari BUKU PETUNJUK).<br />

• Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, tutup ujung-ujung terminal-terminal TIDAK DIGUNAKAN dengan<br />

pita isolasi.<br />

• Pendingin menjadi sangat panas setelah digunakan. Hati-hati untuk tidak menyentuhnya ketika<br />

memindahkan alat penerima ini.<br />

TINDAKAN-TINDAKAN PENCEGAHAN pada suplai power dan<br />

sambungan-sambungan speaker:<br />

• JANGAN sambungkan ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke baterai mobil; sebaliknya,<br />

alat penerima tersebut akan secara serius rusak.<br />

• SEBELUM menyambung ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke speaker-speaker, cek perkabelan<br />

speaker dalam mobil anda.<br />

Daftar bagian-bagian untuk pemasangan dan penyambungan<br />

Bagian-bagian berikut disediakan untuk alat penerima ini. Jika ada bagian yang hilang, segera hubungi<br />

dealer audio mobil <strong>JVC</strong> anda.<br />

G<br />

Lock nut (M5)<br />

Mur kunci (M5)<br />

K<br />

Remote controller<br />

Pengontrol jauh<br />

D<br />

Trim plate<br />

Plat rapi<br />

H<br />

Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)<br />

Baut bingkai (M5 × 20 mm)<br />

L<br />

Battery<br />

Baterai


INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)<br />

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information<br />

regarding installation kits, consult your <strong>JVC</strong> car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.<br />

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.<br />

Removing the unit<br />

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.<br />

When using the optional stay / Ketika menggunakan<br />

penguat tambahan<br />

Dashboard<br />

Tempat alat pada<br />

bagian depan<br />

Fire wall<br />

Dinding tahan api<br />

Stay (option)<br />

Penguat (tambahan)<br />

Screw (option)<br />

Sekrup (tambahan)<br />

Install the unit at an angle of less<br />

than 30˚.<br />

Pasang penerima pada suatu sudut<br />

kurang dari 30˚.<br />

* 1 When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.<br />

* 2 Not supplied for this unit.<br />

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Ketika memasang alat penerima<br />

tanpa menggunakan selongsong<br />

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.<br />

Dalam sebuah kereta Toyota misalnya, pertama pindahkan radio mobil dan pasang alat penerima tersebut ke dalam tempatnya.<br />

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)* 2<br />

Sekrup-sekrup tipe rata (M5 × 8 mm) * 2<br />

Pocket<br />

Kantong<br />

Note : When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are<br />

used, they could damage the unit.<br />

Catatan : Ketika memasang alat penerima pada breket bingkai, pastikan untuk menggunakan sekrup-sekrup panjang–<br />

8 mm. Jika sekrup yang lebih panjang digunakan, maka dapat merusak alat penerima.<br />

2<br />

PEMASANGAN (BINGKAI-DALAM DASH)<br />

Ilustrasi berikut menunjukkan sebuah tipe pemasangan. Jika anda mempunyai suatu pertanyaan atau<br />

informasi yang diperlukan mengenai alat-alat pemasangan, konsultasikan pada penyalur audio mobil <strong>JVC</strong><br />

atau sebuah perusahaan yang mensuplai alat-alat.<br />

• Jika anda tidak yakin bagaimana memasang alat penerima ini dengan benar, biarkan dipasang dengan<br />

teknisi yang berkualitas.<br />

Do the required electrical connections.<br />

Lakukan penyambungan-penyambungan listrik<br />

yang diperlukan.<br />

Memindahkan alat penerima<br />

Sebelum memindahkan alat penerima, lepaskan seksi belakang.<br />

Insert the two handles, then pull them as<br />

illustrated so that the unit can be removed.<br />

Sisipkan kedua pemegang dan tarik pemegang<br />

seperti yang diilustrasikan hingga alat penerima<br />

dapat dipindahkan.<br />

Bracket* 2<br />

Breket * 2<br />

Bracket* 2<br />

Breket * 2<br />

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the<br />

sleeve firmly in place.<br />

Bengkokkan pengait-pengait yang tepat<br />

untuk menahan selongsong secara kuat<br />

pada tempatnya.<br />

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)* 2<br />

Sekrup-sekrup tipe rata (M5 × 8 mm) * 2<br />

* 1 Ketika anda memberdirikan alat penerima, hati-hati untuk tidak merusak sekring di belakang.<br />

* 2 Tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini.


ENGLISH INDONESIA<br />

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS SAMBUNGAN-SAMBUNGAN LISTRIK<br />

A<br />

Typical connections / Ciri khas sambungan-sambungan<br />

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious<br />

damage to this unit.<br />

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.<br />

1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.<br />

2 Connect the antenna cord.<br />

3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.<br />

Rear ground terminal<br />

Terminal tanah belakang<br />

White with black stripe<br />

Putih dengan strip hitam<br />

Antenna terminal<br />

Terminal antena<br />

Line out (see diagram )<br />

Keluaran (lihat diagram )<br />

White<br />

Putih<br />

Left speaker (front)<br />

Speaker kiri (depan)<br />

Gray with black stripe<br />

Abu-abu dengan strip hitam<br />

15 A fuse<br />

Sekring 15 A<br />

Black<br />

Hitam<br />

Yellow * 2<br />

Kuning * 2<br />

Red<br />

Merah<br />

Blue<br />

Biru<br />

Blue with white stripe<br />

Biru dengan strip putih<br />

Gray<br />

Abu-abu<br />

Right speaker (front)<br />

Speaker kanan (depan)<br />

* 1 Not supplied for this unit.<br />

* 2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power<br />

cannot be turned on.<br />

Green with black stripe<br />

Hijau dengan strip hitam<br />

3<br />

Sebelum penyambungan: Cek perkabelan dalam mobil dengan hati-hati. Penyambungan yang tidak<br />

benar mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan serius pada alat penerima.<br />

Ujung dari kabel power dan beberapa konektor dari bodi mobil mungkin berbeda dalam warna.<br />

1 Sambungkan ujung berwarna dari kabel power dalam urutan spesifikasi pada ilustrasi di bawah.<br />

2 Sambungkan kabel antena.<br />

3 Akhirnya sambungkan dudukan kabel ke alat penerima.<br />

To metallic body or chassis of the car<br />

Ke besi bodi atau casis dari mobil tersebut<br />

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery<br />

(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)<br />

Ke sebuah tempat terminal dalam blok sekring disambungkan ke baterai<br />

mobil (abaikan saklar kontak) (konstant 12 V)<br />

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block<br />

Ke sebuah terminal aksesoris dalam blok sekring<br />

To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)<br />

Ke antena otomatis jika ada (maksimum 250 mA)<br />

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)<br />

Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain (maksimum 200 mA)<br />

Green<br />

Hijau<br />

Left speaker (rear)<br />

Speaker kiri (belakang)<br />

Purple with black stripe<br />

Ungu dengan strip hitam<br />

Ignition switch<br />

Saklar kontak<br />

Fuse block<br />

Blok sekring<br />

Purple<br />

Ungu<br />

Right speaker (rear)<br />

Speaker kanan<br />

(belakang)<br />

* 1 Tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini.<br />

* 2 Sebelum pengecekan pengoperasian dari alat penerima ini sebelum pemasangan, ujung ini harus sudah<br />

dihubungkan, selain itu power tidak dapat dihidupkan.


B<br />

Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer / Penyambungan penguat eksternal atau subwoofer<br />

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.<br />

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it<br />

can be controlled through this unit.<br />

• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker<br />

leads of this unit unused.<br />

Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 12 of the<br />

INSTRUCTIONS.)<br />

Setel “L/O MODE ” ke “REAR ” (Lihat halaman 12 dari<br />

BUKU PETUNJUK.)<br />

You can connect a power amplifier for rear speakers.<br />

Anda dapat menghubungkan penguat daya untuk pengeras<br />

suara bagian belakang.<br />

Rear speakers<br />

Speaker-speaker<br />

belakang<br />

Subwoofer<br />

Subwoofer<br />

<strong>JVC</strong> Amplifier<br />

Penguat <strong>JVC</strong><br />

Set “L/O MODE” to “WOOFER” (See page 12 of the<br />

INSTRUCTIONS.)<br />

Setel “L/O MODE ” ke “WOOFER ” (Lihat halaman 12 dari<br />

BUKU PETUNJUK.)<br />

You can also connect a subwoofer to the REAR LINE OUT<br />

terminals.<br />

Anda juga dapat menghubungkan subwoofer ke terminal<br />

REAR LINE OUT.<br />

* 3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with<br />

paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage<br />

to the unit.<br />

* 4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)<br />

TROUBLESHOOTING<br />

• The fuse blows.<br />

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?<br />

• Power cannot be turned on.<br />

* Is the yellow lead connected?<br />

• No sound from the speakers.<br />

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?<br />

• Sound is distorted.<br />

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?<br />

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?<br />

• Noise interfere with sounds.<br />

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?<br />

• This unit becomes hot.<br />

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?<br />

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?<br />

• This unit does not work at all.<br />

* Have you reset your unit?<br />

<strong>JVC</strong> Amplifier<br />

Penguat <strong>JVC</strong><br />

or<br />

atau<br />

4<br />

Anda dapat menyambungkan penguat-penguat untuk meningkatkan sistem stereo mobil anda.<br />

• Sambungkan ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih) ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain sehingga dapat<br />

dikontrol melalui alat penerima ini.<br />

• Putuskan sambungan speaker-speaker dari alat penerima ini, sambungkan ini ke penguat.<br />

Biarkan ujung speaker dari alat penerima ini tidak digunakan.<br />

Remote lead<br />

Ujung jauh<br />

Remote lead (blue with white stripe)<br />

Ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih)<br />

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)<br />

Konektor Y (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)<br />

To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any<br />

Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain atau antena otomatis jika ada<br />

Front speakers<br />

Speaker-speaker depan<br />

* 3 Pasangkan dengan kuat kabel tanah ke bodi besi atau ke casis dari mobil—pada tempat yang tidak dilapisi cat<br />

(jika dilapisi cat, hilangkan cat sebelum memasang kabel). Kegagalan melakukan ini mungkin menyebabkan<br />

kerusakan pada alat penerima tersebut.<br />

* 4 Kabel sinyal (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)<br />

PEMECAHAN MASALAH<br />

• Sekring meledak.<br />

* Apakah ujung-ujung merah dan hitam tersambung dengan benar?<br />

• Power tidak dapat dihidupkan.<br />

* Apakah ujung kuning sudah tersambung?<br />

• Tidak ada suara dari speaker.<br />

* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker terhubung pendek?<br />

• Suara terdistorsi.<br />

* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?<br />

* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?<br />

• Berisik yang mengganggu suara-suara.<br />

* Apakah terminal tanahan belakang tersambung ke casis mobil menggunakan kabel-kabel terpendek dan<br />

tertebal?<br />

• Alat penerima menjadi panas.<br />

* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?<br />

* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?<br />

• Alat penerima ini tidak bekerja secara keseluruhan.<br />

* Apakah anda sudah reset (memasang kembali) alat penerima anda?


CD RECEIVER <strong>KD</strong>-G336S<br />

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.<br />

INSTRUCTIONS<br />

GET0553-001A<br />

[UI]


2<br />

Thank you for purchasing a <strong>JVC</strong> product.<br />

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to obtain the best<br />

possible performance from the unit.<br />

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS<br />

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT<br />

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to<br />

qualified service personnel.<br />

3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation when open. Do not view directly with optical<br />

instruments.<br />

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.<br />

Warning:<br />

[European Union only]<br />

If you need to operate the unit while driving, be<br />

sure to look ahead carefully or you may be involved<br />

in a traffic accident.<br />

Caution on volume setting:<br />

Discs produce very little noise compared with other<br />

sources. Lower the volume before playing a disc<br />

to avoid damaging the speakers by the sudden<br />

increase of the output level.<br />

How to reset your unit<br />

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.<br />

How to forcibly eject a disc<br />

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.<br />

• If this does not work, reset your unit.


How to use the M MODE button<br />

If you press M MODE, the unit goes into functions<br />

mode, then the number buttons and ¢/4<br />

buttons work as different function buttons.<br />

Ex.: When number button 2 works as<br />

MO (monaural) button.<br />

To use these buttons for their original functions<br />

again after pressing M MODE, wait for 5 seconds<br />

without pressing any of these buttons until the<br />

functions mode is cleared or press M MODE again.<br />

Detaching the control panel<br />

Attaching the control panel<br />

CONTENTS<br />

Control panel .................................. 4<br />

Remote controller — RM-RK50 ........... 5<br />

Getting started ................................ 6<br />

Basic operations ................................................... 6<br />

Radio operations ............................. 7<br />

Disc operations ................................ 8<br />

Playing a disc in the unit ..................................... 8<br />

Sound adjustments .......................... 10<br />

General settings — PSM .................. 11<br />

Maintenance ................................... 13<br />

More about this unit ........................ 14<br />

Troubleshooting .............................. 16<br />

Specifications .................................. 17<br />

For safety...<br />

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as this will<br />

block outside sounds, making driving dangerous.<br />

• Stop the car before performing any complicated<br />

operations.<br />

Temperature inside the car...<br />

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot or cold<br />

weather, wait until the temperature in the car becomes<br />

normal before operating the unit.<br />

3


4<br />

Control panel<br />

Display window<br />

1 0 (eject) button<br />

2 Loading slot<br />

3 (standby/on/attenuator) button<br />

4 Remote sensor<br />

DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong light<br />

(direct sunlight or artificial lighting).<br />

5 SOURCE button<br />

6 Display window<br />

7 BAND button<br />

8 EQ (equalizer) button<br />

9 ¢/4 buttons<br />

p Control dial<br />

q SEL (select) button<br />

w DISP (display) button<br />

e MO (monaural) button<br />

r SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory) button<br />

t Number buttons<br />

y RPT (repeat) button<br />

Parts identification<br />

u RND (random) button<br />

i M MODE button<br />

o (control panel release) button<br />

; Disc information indicators—<br />

TAG (Tag information), (track/file), (folder)<br />

a DISC indicator<br />

s Playback mode / item indicators—RND (random),<br />

(disc), (folder), RPT (repeat)<br />

d Tuner reception indicators—MO (monaural),<br />

ST (stereo)<br />

f S.BASS (super bass) indicator<br />

g EQ (equalizer) indicator<br />

h Tr (track) indicator<br />

j Source display / Volume level indicator / Time<br />

countdown indicator<br />

k Main display<br />

l Sound mode (iEQ: intelligent equalizer)<br />

indicators—JAZZ, ROCK, HIP HOP, CLASSIC, POPS,<br />

USER


Remote controller — RM-RK50<br />

Installing the lithium coin battery<br />

(CR2025)<br />

Aim the remote controller directly at the remote<br />

sensor on the unit. Make sure there is no obstacle<br />

in between.<br />

Warning:<br />

• Do not install any battery other than CR2025 or<br />

its equivalent; otherwise, it may explode.<br />

• Do not leave the remote controller in a place<br />

(such as dashboards) exposed to direct sunlight<br />

for a long time; otherwise, it may explode.<br />

• Store the battery in a place where children<br />

cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.<br />

• To prevent the battery from over-heating,<br />

cracking, or starting a fire:<br />

– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat the<br />

battery, or dispose of it in a fire.<br />

– Do not leave the battery with other metallic<br />

materials.<br />

– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or similar<br />

tools.<br />

– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate when<br />

throwing away or saving it.<br />

Main elements and features<br />

1 (standby/on/attenuator) button<br />

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or<br />

attenuates the sound when the power is on.<br />

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.<br />

2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons<br />

• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.<br />

• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.<br />

• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA discs.<br />

3 VOL – / VOL + buttons<br />

• Adjusts the volume level.<br />

4 SOUND button<br />

• Selects the sound mode (iEQ: intelligent<br />

equalizer).<br />

5 SOURCE button<br />

• Selects the source.<br />

6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons<br />

• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.<br />

• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if pressed and<br />

held.<br />

• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.<br />

5


6<br />

Getting started<br />

Basic operations<br />

~ Turn on the power.<br />

Ÿ<br />

* You cannot select “CD” as the playback source if<br />

there is no disc in the unit.<br />

! For FM/AM tuner<br />

⁄ Adjust the volume.<br />

@ Adjust the sound as you want. (See<br />

pages 10 and 11.)<br />

To drop the volume in a<br />

moment (ATT)<br />

To restore the sound, press the<br />

button again.<br />

To turn off the power<br />

Volume level appears.<br />

Basic settings<br />

• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages 11 and<br />

12.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

1 Canceling the display demonstrations<br />

Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”<br />

2 Setting the clock<br />

Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust the hour.<br />

Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then adjust the<br />

minute.<br />

3 Finish the procedure.<br />

To check the current clock time while the<br />

power is turned off<br />

Clock time is shown on the<br />

display for about 5 seconds. See<br />

also page 12.


Radio operations<br />

~<br />

Ÿ<br />

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo<br />

broadcast with sufficient signal strength.<br />

! Start searching for a station.<br />

When a station is received,<br />

searching stops.<br />

To stop searching, press the<br />

same button again.<br />

To tune in to a station manually<br />

In step ! above...<br />

1<br />

2 Select a desired station frequency.<br />

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to<br />

receive<br />

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be lost.<br />

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same<br />

procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO indicator<br />

goes off.<br />

Storing stations in memory<br />

You can preset six stations for each band.<br />

FM station automatic presetting —<br />

SSM (Strong-station Sequential<br />

Memory)<br />

1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you want to<br />

store into.<br />

2<br />

3<br />

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.<br />

“SSM” flashes, then disappears when automatic<br />

presetting is over.<br />

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are<br />

searched and stored automatically in the FM band.<br />

7


8<br />

Manual presetting<br />

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset number<br />

4 of the FM1 band.<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

1<br />

Preset number flashes for a while.<br />

Listening to a preset station<br />

2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you want.<br />

To check the other information while<br />

listening to an FM or AM station<br />

Clock Ô Frequency<br />

Disc operations<br />

Playing a disc in the unit<br />

~ Turn on the power.<br />

Ÿ<br />

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you<br />

change the source or eject the disc.<br />

To stop play and eject the<br />

disc<br />

• Press SOURCE to listen to<br />

another playback source.<br />

To fast-forward or reverse<br />

the track<br />

To go to the next or<br />

previous tracks<br />

To go to the next or previous folders (only<br />

for MP3 or WMA discs)


To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder<br />

(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly<br />

To select a number from 01 – 06:<br />

To select a number from 07 – 12:<br />

• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA discs, it<br />

is required that folders are assigned with 2-digit<br />

numbers at the beginning of their folder names—<br />

01, 02, 03, and so on.<br />

To select a particular track in a<br />

folder (for MP3 or WMA disc):<br />

Prohibiting disc ejection<br />

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.<br />

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same<br />

procedure.<br />

Changing the display information<br />

While playing an audio CD or a<br />

CD Text<br />

While playing an MP3 or a WMA disc<br />

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”<br />

(see page 12)<br />

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”<br />

: Clock with the current track number<br />

: Elapsed playing time with the current<br />

track number<br />

: Corresponding indicator lights up on the<br />

display<br />

* 1 If the current disc is an audio CD, “NO NAME” appears.<br />

* 2 If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag information,<br />

folder name and file name appear. In this case, the<br />

TAG indicator will not light up.<br />

9


10<br />

Selecting the playback modes<br />

You can use only one of the following playback modes<br />

at a time.<br />

1<br />

2 Select your desired playback mode.<br />

7 Repeat play<br />

Mode Plays repeatedly<br />

TRK RPT : The current track.<br />

FLDR RPT * : All tracks of the current folder.<br />

RPT OFF : Cancels.<br />

7 Random play<br />

Mode Plays at random<br />

FLDR RND * : All tracks of the current folder,<br />

then tracks of the next folder and<br />

so on.<br />

DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc.<br />

RND OFF : Cancels.<br />

* Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA disc.<br />

: Corresponding indicator lights up on<br />

the display<br />

Sound adjustments<br />

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to the<br />

music genre (iEQ: intelligent equalizer).<br />

BAS*<br />

Indication (For)<br />

1 MID* 2 TRE* 3 S.BS* 4<br />

Preset values<br />

USER<br />

(Flat sound)<br />

00 00 00 OFF<br />

ROCK<br />

(Rock or disco music)<br />

+03 00 +02 ON<br />

CLASSIC<br />

(Classical music)<br />

+01 00 +03 OFF<br />

POPS<br />

(Light music)<br />

+02 +01 +02 OFF<br />

HIP HOP<br />

(Funk or rap music)<br />

+04 –02 +01 ON<br />

JAZZ<br />

(Jazz music)<br />

+03 00 +03 OFF<br />

* 1 : Bass; * 2 : Middle; * 3 : Treble; * 4 : Super bass<br />

Adjusting the sound<br />

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your<br />

preference.<br />

1<br />

2


Indication, [Range]<br />

BAS * 2 (bass), [–06 to +06]<br />

Adjust the bass.<br />

MID * 2 (middle), [–06 to +06]<br />

Adjust the middle frequencies sound level.<br />

TRE * 2 (treble), [–06 to +06]<br />

Adjust the treble.<br />

FAD * 3 (fader), [R06 to F06]<br />

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.<br />

BAL * 4 (balance), [L06 to R06]<br />

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.<br />

S.BS * 2 (super bass), [S.BS ON or S.BS OFF], [01 to 05]* 5<br />

Maintain the richness and fullness of the bass sound<br />

regardless of how low you set the volume.<br />

SUB.W (subwoofer), [00 to 08]<br />

Adjust the subwoofer output level.<br />

VOL (volume), [00 to 30 or 50 * 6 ]<br />

Adjust the volume.<br />

* 1 Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER”<br />

(see page 12).<br />

* 2 When you adjust the bass, middle, treble, or super<br />

bass, the adjustment you have made is stored for the<br />

currently selected sound mode (iEQ) including “USER.”<br />

* 3 If you are using a two-speaker system, set the fader<br />

level to “00.”<br />

* 4 The adjustment cannot affect the subwoofer output.<br />

* 5 Range adjustment for super bass is adjustable only<br />

when it is set to “S.BS ON.”<br />

* 6 Depending on the amplifier gain control setting. (See<br />

page 12 for details.)<br />

General settings — PSM<br />

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode) items<br />

listed in the table that follows.<br />

1<br />

2 Select a PSM item.<br />

3 Adjust the PSM item selected.<br />

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other PSM<br />

items if necessary.<br />

5 Finish the procedure.<br />

Continued on the next page<br />

11


12<br />

Indications Item<br />

( : Initial)<br />

DEMO<br />

Display demonstration<br />

CLK DISP * 1<br />

Clock display<br />

CLOCK H<br />

Hour adjustment<br />

CLOCK M<br />

Minute adjustment<br />

DIMMER<br />

Dimmer<br />

SCROLL * 2<br />

Scroll<br />

L/O MODE<br />

Line output mode<br />

WOOFER * 3<br />

Subwoofer cutoff<br />

frequency<br />

TAG DISP<br />

Tag display<br />

AMP GAIN<br />

Amplifier gain control<br />

• DEMO ON<br />

• DEMO OFF<br />

• ON<br />

• OFF<br />

Selectable settings, [reference page]<br />

: Display demonstration will be activated automatically if no<br />

operation is done for about 20 seconds, [6].<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: Clock time is shown on the display at all times when the power is<br />

turned off.<br />

: Cancels; pressing DISP will show the clock time for about<br />

5 seconds when the power is turned off, [6].<br />

1 – 12 [Initial: 1 (1:00)], [6]<br />

00 – 59 [Initial: 00 (1:00)], [6]<br />

• ON<br />

• OFF<br />

• ONCE<br />

• AUTO<br />

• OFF<br />

• REAR<br />

• WOOFER<br />

• LOW<br />

• MID<br />

• HIGH<br />

• TAG ON<br />

• TAG OFF<br />

• LOW PWR<br />

• HIGH PWR<br />

: Dims the display illumination.<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: Scrolls the disc information once.<br />

: Repeats scrolling (at 5-second intervals).<br />

: Cancels.<br />

• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display<br />

regardless of the setting.<br />

: Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting the<br />

speakers (through an external amplifier).<br />

: Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for connecting a<br />

subwoofer (through an external amplifier).<br />

: Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.<br />

: Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.<br />

: Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.<br />

: Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/WMA tracks, [9].<br />

: Cancels.<br />

: VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of the<br />

speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from damaging the<br />

speaker.)<br />

: VOL 00 – VOL 50<br />

* 1 If the power supply is not interrupted by turning off the ignition key of your car, it is recommended to select “OFF” to<br />

save the car’s battery.<br />

* 2 Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.<br />

* 3 Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”


Maintenance<br />

How to clean the connectors<br />

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the connectors.<br />

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe the<br />

connectors with a cotton swab or cloth moistened with<br />

alcohol, being careful not to damage the connectors.<br />

Connector<br />

Moisture condensation<br />

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the unit in<br />

the following cases:<br />

• After starting the heater in the car.<br />

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.<br />

Should this occur, the unit malfunction. In this case,<br />

eject the disc and leave the unit turned on for a few<br />

hours until the moisture evaporates.<br />

How to handle discs<br />

When removing a disc from its Center holder<br />

case, press down the center holder<br />

of the case and lift the disc out,<br />

holding it by the edges.<br />

• Always hold the disc by the edges.<br />

Do not touch its recording surface.<br />

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert the<br />

disc around the center holder (with the printed surface<br />

facing up).<br />

• Make sure to store discs into the cases after use.<br />

To keep discs clean<br />

A dirty disc may not play correctly.<br />

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it with<br />

a soft cloth in a straight line from center<br />

to edge.<br />

• Do not use any solvent (for example, conventional<br />

record cleaner, spray, thinner, benzine, etc.) to clean<br />

discs.<br />

To play new discs<br />

New discs may have some rough spots<br />

around the inner and outer edges. If<br />

such a disc is used, this unit may reject<br />

the disc.<br />

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with a<br />

pencil or ball-point pen, etc.<br />

Do not use the following discs:<br />

Warped disc<br />

Sticker<br />

Sticker residue<br />

Stick-on label<br />

Unusual shape<br />

Single CD (8 cm disc)<br />

13


14<br />

More about this unit<br />

Basic operations<br />

Turning on the power<br />

• By pressing SOURCE on the unit, you can also turn on<br />

the power. If the source is ready, playback also starts.<br />

Turning off the power<br />

• If you turn off the power while listening to a disc, disc<br />

play will start from where playback has been stopped<br />

previously, next time you turn on the power.<br />

Tuner operations<br />

Storing stations in memory<br />

• During SSM search...<br />

– All previously stored stations are erased and<br />

stations are stored newly.<br />

– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest<br />

frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).<br />

– When SSM is over, the station stored in No. 1 will<br />

be automatically tuned in.<br />

• When storing a station manually, the previously<br />

preset station is erased when a new station is stored<br />

in the same preset number.<br />

Disc operations<br />

Caution for DualDisc playback<br />

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply<br />

with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.<br />

Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on<br />

this product may not be recommended.<br />

General<br />

• This unit has been designed to reproduce<br />

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/CD-RWs<br />

(Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA), MP3 and WMA<br />

formats.<br />

• MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and “track” are<br />

used interchangeably) are recorded in “folders.”<br />

• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3 or<br />

WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent sounds.<br />

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW<br />

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.<br />

• This unit can play back only files of the same type<br />

which are first detected if a disc includes both audio<br />

CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/WMA files.<br />

• This unit can play back multi-session discs; however,<br />

unclosed sessions will be skipped while playing.<br />

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not be played back on<br />

this unit because of their disc characteristics, or for<br />

the following reasons:<br />

– Discs are dirty or scratched.<br />

– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens inside<br />

the unit.<br />

– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.<br />

– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are written with<br />

“Packet Write” method.<br />

– There are improper recording conditions (missing<br />

data, etc.) or media conditions (stained, scratched,<br />

warped, etc.).<br />

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time since the<br />

reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than that of regular<br />

CDs.<br />

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:<br />

– Discs with stickers, labels, or protective seal stuck<br />

to the surface.<br />

– Discs on which labels can be directly printed by an<br />

ink jet printer.<br />

Using these discs under high temperatures or high<br />

humidities may cause malfunctions or damage to the<br />

unit.<br />

Playing an MP3/WMA disc<br />

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files with the<br />

extension code or (regardless of<br />

the letter case—upper/lower).<br />

• This unit can show the names of albums, artists<br />

(performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, or<br />

2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA files.


• This unit can display only one-byte characters. No<br />

other characters can be correctly displayed.<br />

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files meeting the<br />

conditions below:<br />

– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps<br />

– Sampling frequency:<br />

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)<br />

24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)<br />

– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/ Level 2, Romeo,<br />

Joliet, Windows long file name<br />

• The maximum number of characters for file/folder<br />

names vary among the disc format used (includes 4<br />

extension characters— or ).<br />

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters<br />

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters<br />

– Romeo: up to 64 characters<br />

– Joliet: up to 32 characters<br />

– Windows long file name: up to 128 characters<br />

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of 200<br />

folders, and of 8 hierarchies.<br />

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR (variable<br />

bit rate).<br />

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy in elapsed<br />

time display, and do not show the actual elapsed<br />

time. Especially, after performing the search function,<br />

this difference becomes noticeable.<br />

• This unit cannot play back the following files:<br />

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and MP3 PRO format.<br />

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate format.<br />

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.<br />

– WMA files encoded with lossless, professional, and<br />

voice format.<br />

– WMA files which are not based upon Windows<br />

Media® Audio.<br />

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.<br />

– Files which have the data such as WAVE, ATRAC3,<br />

etc.<br />

• The search function works but search speed is not<br />

constant.<br />

Changing the source<br />

• If you change the source, playback also stops<br />

(without ejecting the disc).<br />

Next time you select “CD” for the playback source,<br />

disc play starts from where it has been stopped<br />

previously.<br />

Ejecting a disc<br />

• If the ejected disc is not removed within 15 seconds,<br />

the disc is automatically inserted again into the<br />

loading slot to protect it from dust.<br />

• After ejecting a disc, “NO DISC” appears and you<br />

cannot operate some of the buttons. Insert another<br />

disc or press SOURCE to select another playback<br />

source.<br />

General settings—PSM<br />

• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from<br />

“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the volume level<br />

is set higher than “VOL 30,” the unit automatically<br />

changes the volume level to “VOL 30.”<br />

Microsoft and Windows Media are either registered<br />

trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation<br />

in the United States and/or other countries.<br />

15


16<br />

Troubleshooting<br />

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service center.<br />

General<br />

FM/AM<br />

Disc playback<br />

MP3/WMA playback<br />

Symptoms Remedies/Causes<br />

• Sound cannot be heard from the speakers. • Adjust the volume to the optimum level.<br />

• Check the cords and connections.<br />

• The unit does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).<br />

• SSM automatic presetting does not work. Store stations manually.<br />

• Static noise while listening to the radio. Connect the antenna firmly.<br />

• Disc cannot be played back. Insert the disc correctly.<br />

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back.<br />

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be<br />

skipped.<br />

• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.<br />

• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component which you<br />

used for recording.<br />

• Disc can be neither played back nor ejected. • Unlock the disc (see page 9).<br />

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).<br />

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.<br />

• Change the disc.<br />

• Check the cords and connections.<br />

• “NO DISC” appears on the display. Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.<br />

• Disc cannot be played back. • Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in the<br />

format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1, Level 2,<br />

Romeo, or Joliet.<br />

• Add the extension code or to the<br />

file names.<br />

• Noise is generated. Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not add the<br />

extension code or to non-MP3 or<br />

WMA tracks.)<br />

• A longer readout time is required (“CHECK” Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.<br />

keeps flashing on the display).<br />

• Tracks are not played back in the order you Playback order is determined when the files are recorded.<br />

have intended.<br />

• Elapsed playing time is not correct. This sometimes occurs during play. This is caused by how<br />

the tracks are recorded on the disc.<br />

• “PLEASE EJECT” appears on the display. Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.<br />

• Correct characters are not displayed (e.g.<br />

album name).<br />

This unit can only display alphabets (upper case),<br />

numbers, and a limited number of symbols.


Specifications<br />

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION<br />

Maximum Power Output:<br />

Front/Rear: 50 W per channel<br />

Continuous Power Output (RMS):<br />

Front/Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω,<br />

40 Hz to 20 000 Hz at no more<br />

than 0.8% total harmonic<br />

distortion.<br />

Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)<br />

Tone Control Range:<br />

Bass: ±12 dB at 60 Hz<br />

Middle: ±12 dB at 1 kHz<br />

Treble: ±12 dB at 7.5 kHz<br />

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz<br />

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB<br />

Line-Out Level/ 2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)<br />

Impedance:<br />

Output Impedance: 1 kΩ<br />

Subwoofer-Out 2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)<br />

Level/Impedance:<br />

TUNER SECTION<br />

Frequency Range:<br />

FM: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz<br />

AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz<br />

FM Tuner<br />

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)<br />

50 dB Quieting 16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)<br />

Sensitivity:<br />

Alternate Channel 65 dB<br />

Selectivity (400 kHz):<br />

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz<br />

Stereo Separation: 30 dB<br />

AM Tuner<br />

Sensitivity/Selectivity: 20 μV/35 dB<br />

CD PLAYER SECTION<br />

Type: Compact disc player<br />

Signal Detection<br />

System:<br />

Non-contact optical pickup<br />

(semiconductor laser)<br />

Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)<br />

Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz<br />

Dynamic Range: 96 dB<br />

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB<br />

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit<br />

MP3 Decoding Format: (MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3)<br />

Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps<br />

WMA (Windows Media® Audio) Decoding Format:<br />

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps<br />

GENERAL<br />

Power Requirement:<br />

Operating Voltage: DC 14.4 V<br />

(11 V to 16 V allowance)<br />

Grounding System: Negative ground<br />

Allowable Operating 0°C to +40°C<br />

Temperature:<br />

Dimensions (W × H × D): (approx.)<br />

Installation Size: 178 mm × 50 mm × 151 mm<br />

Panel Size: 178 mm × 50 mm × 17 mm<br />

Mass: 1.3 kg (excluding accessories)<br />

Design and specifications are subject to change without<br />

notice.<br />

17


Having TROUBLE with operation?<br />

Please reset your unit<br />

Refer to page of How to reset your unit<br />

EN<br />

© 2008 Victor Company of Japan, Limited<br />

0308DTSMDTJEIN


GET0404-002A<br />

[UI]<br />

<strong>KD</strong>-G334<br />

Installation/Connection Manual<br />

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does<br />

not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at <strong>JVC</strong> car audio dealers.<br />

WARNINGS<br />

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all<br />

electrical connections before installing the unit.<br />

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.<br />

Notes:<br />

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your <strong>JVC</strong> car audio<br />

dealer.<br />

• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at<br />

the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than<br />

50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 12 of the<br />

INSTRUCTIONS).<br />

• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads<br />

with insulating tape.<br />

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it<br />

when removing this unit.<br />

Heat sink<br />

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:<br />

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit<br />

will be seriously damaged.<br />

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in<br />

your car.<br />

Parts list for installation and connection<br />

The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your <strong>JVC</strong> car audio dealer<br />

immediately.<br />

A / B<br />

Hard case/Control panel<br />

E<br />

Power cord<br />

I<br />

Rubber cushion<br />

J<br />

Handles<br />

TROUBLESHOOTING<br />

C<br />

Sleeve<br />

F<br />

Washer (ø5)<br />

G<br />

Lock nut (M5)<br />

K<br />

Remote controller<br />

D<br />

Trim plate<br />

H<br />

Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)<br />

L<br />

Battery<br />

• The fuse blows.<br />

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?<br />

• Power cannot be turned on.<br />

* Is the yellow lead connected?<br />

• No sound from the speakers.<br />

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?<br />

• Sound is distorted.<br />

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?<br />

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?<br />

• Noise interfere with sounds.<br />

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?<br />

• This unit becomes hot.<br />

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?<br />

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?<br />

• This unit does not work at all.<br />

* Have you reset your unit?<br />

1<br />

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)<br />

1006DTSMDTJEIN<br />

EN<br />

© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited<br />

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information<br />

regarding installation kits, consult your <strong>JVC</strong> car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.<br />

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.<br />

Do the required electrical<br />

connections.<br />

Removing the unit<br />

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.<br />

Insert the two handles, then pull them as<br />

illustrated so that the unit can be removed.<br />

When using the optional stay<br />

Dashboard<br />

Fire wall<br />

Screw<br />

(option)<br />

Install the unit at an<br />

angle of less than 30˚.<br />

Stay<br />

(option)<br />

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold<br />

the sleeve firmly in place.<br />

When installing the unit<br />

without using the sleeve<br />

In a Toyota car for example, first remove<br />

the car radio and install the unit in its<br />

place.<br />

Bracket* 2<br />

* 1 When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.<br />

* 2 Not supplied for this unit.<br />

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)* 2<br />

Flat type screws<br />

(M5 × 8 mm)*<br />

Note:<br />

When installing the unit on the mounting<br />

bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long<br />

screws. If longer screws are used, they<br />

could damage the unit.<br />

2<br />

Pocket<br />

Bracket* 2


ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS<br />

A<br />

Typical connections<br />

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.<br />

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.<br />

1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.<br />

2 Connect the antenna cord.<br />

3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.<br />

B<br />

Rear ground terminal<br />

White with black stripe<br />

Antenna terminal<br />

Line out (see diagram )<br />

White<br />

Left speaker (front)<br />

Gray with black stripe<br />

Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer<br />

15 A fuse<br />

Black<br />

Yellow * 2<br />

Blue with white stripe<br />

Gray<br />

Right speaker (front)<br />

To metallic body or chassis of the car<br />

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery<br />

(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)<br />

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block<br />

Green with black stripe<br />

* 1 Not supplied for this unit.<br />

* 2 Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be turned on.<br />

* 3 Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.<br />

* 4 Signal cord (not supplied for this unit).<br />

2<br />

To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)<br />

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.<br />

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through this unit.<br />

• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.<br />

Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 12 of the<br />

INSTRUCTIONS.)<br />

You can connect a power amplifier for rear speakers.<br />

Rear speakers<br />

Subwoofer<br />

<strong>JVC</strong> Amplifier<br />

Set “L/O MODE” to “WOOFER” (See page 12 of the<br />

INSTRUCTIONS.)<br />

You can also connect a subwoofer to the REAR LINE OUT<br />

terminals.<br />

<strong>JVC</strong> Amplifier<br />

or<br />

Red<br />

Blue<br />

Remote lead<br />

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)<br />

Green<br />

Left speaker (rear)<br />

Remote lead (blue with white stripe)<br />

Purple with black stripe<br />

Ignition switch<br />

Fuse block<br />

Purple<br />

Right speaker (rear)<br />

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)<br />

To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any<br />

Front speakers

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!